From 76beb218622dc357850d9c7db49a6038e1b2a670 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Robin Gareus Date: Sun, 26 May 2024 23:39:04 +0200 Subject: [PATCH] Remove non-standard @newin doxygen token We are not interested in which version a given GTK method was added. --- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/color.h | 2 - libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/colormap.h | 4 - libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/cursor.h | 10 -- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/device.h | 14 -- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/display.h | 101 ------------ libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/displaymanager.h | 12 -- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/dragcontext.h | 14 -- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/drawable.h | 13 -- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/event.h | 6 - libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/gc.h | 4 - libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/general.h | 20 --- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/image.h | 28 ---- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbuf.h | 16 -- .../ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbufanimationiter.h | 12 -- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/screen.h | 90 ----------- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/visual.h | 20 --- libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/window.h | 117 -------------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/aboutdialog.h | 62 -------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelgroup.h | 6 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelmap.h | 8 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/action.h | 92 ----------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/actiongroup.h | 22 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/activatable.h | 16 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/adjustment.h | 22 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/alignment.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/assistant.h | 50 ------ libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/builder.h | 42 ----- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/button.h | 22 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/buttonbox.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/celllayout.h | 16 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderer.h | 22 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendereraccel.h | 1 - .../ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererprogress.h | 1 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererspin.h | 1 - .../tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderertoggle.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellview.h | 20 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/checkmenuitem.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/clipboard.h | 28 ---- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorbutton.h | 20 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorselection.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/combobox.h | 64 -------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/comboboxentry.h | 8 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/dialog.h | 18 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entry.h | 102 ------------ libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrybuffer.h | 16 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrycompletion.h | 58 ------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/enums.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/eventbox.h | 8 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/expander.h | 34 ---- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooser.h | 126 --------------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserbutton.h | 12 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserwidget.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filefilter.h | 12 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontbutton.h | 24 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontselection.h | 42 ----- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/handlebox.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconinfo.h | 16 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/icontheme.h | 34 ---- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconview.h | 134 ---------------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/image.h | 16 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/imagemenuitem.h | 10 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/infobar.h | 26 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/invisible.h | 6 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/label.h | 30 ---- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/layout.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/linkbutton.h | 14 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/liststore.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/listviewtext.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menu.h | 16 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menubar.h | 8 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menuitem.h | 11 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menushell.h | 8 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menutoolbutton.h | 12 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/messagedialog.h | 14 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/notebook.h | 34 ---- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/offscreenwindow.h | 10 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/orientable.h | 6 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/paned.h | 12 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/plug.h | 6 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/progressbar.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radioaction.h | 6 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radiotoolbutton.h | 12 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/range.h | 36 ----- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/rc.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentaction.h | 6 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooser.h | 66 -------- .../ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserdialog.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchoosermenu.h | 6 - .../ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserwidget.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentfilter.h | 20 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentinfo.h | 46 ------ libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentmanager.h | 26 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scale.h | 10 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scalebutton.h | 29 ---- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scrolledwindow.h | 10 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/selectiondata.h | 30 ---- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/separatortoolitem.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/settings.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/sizegroup.h | 8 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/socket.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/spinner.h | 5 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/statusbar.h | 6 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/style.h | 6 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/table.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textbuffer.h | 24 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textiter.h | 24 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textmark.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textview.h | 22 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggleaction.h | 10 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggletoolbutton.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbar.h | 24 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbutton.h | 28 ---- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitem.h | 62 -------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitemgroup.h | 40 ----- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolpalette.h | 54 ------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolshell.h | 22 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/tooltip.h | 18 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodel.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelfilter.h | 20 --- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelsort.h | 2 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treepath.h | 1 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treerowreference.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeselection.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treestore.h | 4 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeview.h | 74 --------- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeviewcolumn.h | 12 -- libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/uimanager.h | 45 ------ libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/viewport.h | 8 - libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/widget.h | 150 ------------------ libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/window.h | 65 -------- libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relation.h | 2 - libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relationset.h | 1 - libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/text.h | 2 - 133 files changed, 2999 deletions(-) diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/color.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/color.h index 7277a67160..b796df16d1 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/color.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/color.h @@ -216,8 +216,6 @@ public: * where r, g and b are hex digits representing the red, green and blue components respectively. * * @result The string representation. - * - * @newin{2,14} */ Glib::ustring to_string() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/colormap.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/colormap.h index 4632c7ee0f..e9a641cfd4 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/colormap.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/colormap.h @@ -190,16 +190,12 @@ public: /** Gets the screen for which this colormap was created. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The screen for which this colormap was created. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen(); /** Gets the screen for which this colormap was created. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The screen for which this colormap was created. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/cursor.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/cursor.h index 7a3d61dc2f..9270fa2dc5 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/cursor.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/cursor.h @@ -204,16 +204,12 @@ public: /** Returns the display on which the Gdk::Cursor is defined. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The Gdk::Display associated to @a cursor. */ Glib::RefPtr get_display(); /** Returns the display on which the Gdk::Cursor is defined. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The Gdk::Display associated to @a cursor. */ @@ -226,8 +222,6 @@ public: * on the cursor, GDK may not be able to obtain the image data. In this * case, 0 is returned. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf representing @a cursor, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_image(); @@ -238,16 +232,12 @@ public: * on the cursor, GDK may not be able to obtain the image data. In this * case, 0 is returned. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf representing @a cursor, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_image() const; /** Returns the cursor type for this cursor. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::CursorType. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/device.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/device.h index 788f3b00f5..adbaeaa312 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/device.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/device.h @@ -183,8 +183,6 @@ public: /** If @a index has a valid keyval, this function will * fill in @a keyval and @a modifiers with the keyval settings. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param index The index of the macro button to get. * @param keyval Return value for the keyval. * @param modifiers Return value for modifiers. @@ -194,8 +192,6 @@ public: void set_key(guint index_, guint keyval, ModifierType modifiers); /** Returns the axis use for @a index. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @param index The index of the axis. * @return A Gdk::AxisUse specifying how the axis is used. @@ -242,32 +238,24 @@ public: /** Determines the name of the device. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A name. */ Glib::ustring get_name() const; /** Determines the type of the device. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::InputSource. */ InputSource get_source() const; /** Determines the mode of the device. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::InputSource. */ InputMode get_mode() const; /** Determines whether the pointer follows device motion. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return true if the pointer follows device motion. */ @@ -275,8 +263,6 @@ public: /** Gets the number of axes of a device. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return The number of axes of @a device. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/display.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/display.h index 171b4c1df9..94e2f85e07 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/display.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/display.h @@ -115,8 +115,6 @@ protected: public: /** Opens a display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param display_name The name of the display to open. * @return A Gdk::Display, or 0 if the display @@ -126,8 +124,6 @@ public: /** Gets the name of the display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return A string representing the display name. This string is owned * by GDK and should not be modified or freed. @@ -136,16 +132,12 @@ public: /** Gets the number of screen managed by the @a display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return Number of screens. */ int get_n_screens() const; /** Returns a screen object for one of the screens of the display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param screen_num The screen number. * @return The Gdk::Screen object. @@ -153,8 +145,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_screen(int screen_num); /** Returns a screen object for one of the screens of the display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param screen_num The screen number. * @return The Gdk::Screen object. @@ -163,16 +153,12 @@ public: /** Get the default Gdk::Screen for @a display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The default Gdk::Screen object for @a display. */ Glib::RefPtr get_default_screen(); /** Get the default Gdk::Screen for @a display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The default Gdk::Screen object for @a display. */ @@ -180,32 +166,24 @@ public: /** Release any pointer grab. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param timestamp A timestap (e.g. GDK_CURRENT_TIME). */ void pointer_ungrab(guint32 timestamp); /** Release any keyboard grab - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param timestamp A timestap (e.g Gdk::CURRENT_TIME). */ void keyboard_ungrab(guint32 timestamp); /** Test if the pointer is grabbed. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return true if an active X pointer grab is in effect. */ bool pointer_is_grabbed() const; /** Emits a short beep on @a display - * - * @newin{2,2} */ void beep(); @@ -218,15 +196,11 @@ public: * * This is most useful for X11. On windowing systems where requests are * handled synchronously, this function will do nothing. - * - * @newin{2,2} */ void sync(); /** Closes the connection to the windowing system for the given display, * and cleans up associated resources. - * - * @newin{2,2} */ void close(); @@ -234,8 +208,6 @@ public: /** Returns the list of available input devices attached to @a display. * The list is statically allocated and should not be freed. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return A list of Gdk::Device. */ Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr > list_devices(); @@ -243,8 +215,6 @@ public: /** Returns the list of available input devices attached to @a display. * The list is statically allocated and should not be freed. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return A list of Gdk::Device. */ Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr > list_devices() const; @@ -255,8 +225,6 @@ public: /** Gets the next Gdk::Event to be processed for @a display, fetching events from the * windowing system if necessary. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The next Gdk::Event to be processed, or 0 if no events * are pending. The returned Gdk::Event should be freed with Gdk::Event::free(). */ @@ -265,8 +233,6 @@ public: /** Gets the next Gdk::Event to be processed for @a display, fetching events from the * windowing system if necessary. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The next Gdk::Event to be processed, or 0 if no events * are pending. The returned Gdk::Event should be freed with Gdk::Event::free(). */ @@ -278,8 +244,6 @@ public: * not get more events from the windowing system. It only checks the events * that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.) * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return A copy of the first Gdk::Event on the event queue, or 0 * if no events are in the queue. The returned Gdk::Event should be freed with * Gdk::Event::free(). @@ -291,8 +255,6 @@ public: * not get more events from the windowing system. It only checks the events * that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.) * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return A copy of the first Gdk::Event on the event queue, or 0 * if no events are in the queue. The returned Gdk::Event should be freed with * Gdk::Event::free(). @@ -302,8 +264,6 @@ public: /** Appends a copy of the given event onto the front of the event * queue for @a display. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param event A Gdk::Event. */ void put_event(GdkEvent* event); @@ -315,8 +275,6 @@ public: * See Gdk::Window::add_filter() if you are interested in filtering other * types of events. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param message_type The type of ClientMessage events to receive. * This will be checked against the @a message_type field * of the XClientMessage event struct. @@ -331,8 +289,6 @@ public: * Applications should not set this, it is a global * user-configured setting. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param msec Double click time in milliseconds (thousandths of a second). */ void set_double_click_time(guint msec); @@ -343,8 +299,6 @@ public: * Applications should not set this, it is a global * user-configured setting. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param distance Distance in pixels. */ void set_double_click_distance(guint distance); @@ -354,8 +308,6 @@ public: * function for * gdk_display_manager_get_default_display (manager_get()). * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return A Gdk::Display, or 0 if there is no default * display. */ @@ -363,8 +315,6 @@ public: /** Returns the core pointer device for the given display - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The core pointer device; this is owned by the * display and should not be freed. @@ -372,8 +322,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_core_pointer(); /** Returns the core pointer device for the given display - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The core pointer device; this is owned by the * display and should not be freed. @@ -409,8 +357,6 @@ public: * if the window under the mouse pointer is not known to GDK (for example, * belongs to another application). * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param win_x Return location for x coordinate of the pointer location relative * to the window origin, or 0. * @param win_y Return location for y coordinate of the pointer location relative @@ -424,8 +370,6 @@ public: * if the window under the mouse pointer is not known to GDK (for example, * belongs to another application). * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param win_x Return location for x coordinate of the pointer location relative * to the window origin, or 0. * @param win_y Return location for y coordinate of the pointer location relative @@ -461,8 +405,6 @@ public: * some rare use cases like keyboard navigation support * for the color picker in the Gtk::ColorSelectionDialog. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param screen The screen of @a display to warp the pointer to. * @param x The x coordinate of the destination. * @param y The y coordinate of the destination. @@ -478,8 +420,6 @@ public: * event recorder. Applications should never have any * reason to use this facility. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param new_hooks A table of pointers to functions for getting * quantities related to the current pointer position. * @return The previous pointer hook table. @@ -512,7 +452,6 @@ public: /** Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window. * - * @newin{2,2} * @deprecated Use the version that takes a GdkNativeWindow. * @param xid The X id of the destination window. * @param protocol Location where the supported DND protocol is returned. @@ -531,8 +470,6 @@ public: /** Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param xid The windowing system id of the destination window. * @param protocol Location where the supported DND protocol is returned. @@ -544,16 +481,12 @@ public: /** Returns the Gdk::Keymap attached to @a display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The Gdk::Keymap attached to @a display. */ GdkKeymap* get_keymap(); /** Returns the Gdk::Keymap attached to @a display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The Gdk::Keymap attached to @a display. */ @@ -565,7 +498,6 @@ public: #ifdef G_OS_WIN32 /** Send a response to SelectionRequest event. * - * @newin{2,2} * @param requestor Window to which to deliver response. * @param selection Selection that was requested. * @param target Target that was selected. @@ -582,7 +514,6 @@ public: /** Send a response to SelectionRequest event. * - * @newin{2,2} * @param requestor Window to which to deliver response. * @param selection Selection that was requested. * @param target Target that was selected. @@ -598,8 +529,6 @@ public: * For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib * XID. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param anid A native pixmap handle. * @return The Gdk::Pixmap wrapper for the native pixmap, * or 0 if there is none. @@ -611,8 +540,6 @@ public: * For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib * XID. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param anid A native pixmap handle. * @return The Gdk::Pixmap wrapper for the native pixmap, * or 0 if there is none. @@ -629,8 +556,6 @@ public: * * This is most useful for X11. On windowing systems where requests are * handled synchronously, this function will do nothing. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void flush(); @@ -638,8 +563,6 @@ public: * on @a display. Otherwise, cursors are restricted to bilevel * alpha (i.e. a mask). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return Whether cursors can have alpha channels. */ bool supports_cursor_alpha() const; @@ -648,23 +571,17 @@ public: * on @a display. Otherwise, cursors have only a forground * and a background color. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return Whether cursors can have multiple colors. */ bool supports_cursor_color() const; /** Returns the default size to use for cursors on @a display. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The default cursor size. */ guint get_default_cursor_size() const; /** Gets the maximal size to use for cursors on @a display. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param width The return location for the maximal cursor width. * @param height The return location for the maximal cursor height. @@ -676,8 +593,6 @@ public: * on @a display. This window is implicitly created by GDK. * See Gdk::Window::set_group(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The default group leader window for @a display. */ Glib::RefPtr get_default_group(); @@ -686,8 +601,6 @@ public: * on @a display. This window is implicitly created by GDK. * See Gdk::Window::set_group(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The default group leader window for @a display. */ Glib::RefPtr get_default_group() const; @@ -698,8 +611,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether Gdk::EventOwnerChange events will be * sent when the owner of a selection changes. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return Whether Gdk::EventOwnerChange events will * be sent. */ @@ -708,8 +619,6 @@ public: /** Request Gdk::EventOwnerChange events for ownership changes * of the selection named by the given atom. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param selection The Gdk::Atom naming the selection for which * ownership change notification is requested. * @return Whether Gdk::EventOwnerChange events will @@ -723,8 +632,6 @@ public: * application has quit. On X11 this checks if a clipboard daemon is * running. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return true if the display supports clipboard persistance. */ bool supports_clipboard_persistence() const; @@ -733,8 +640,6 @@ public: * saving all available targets. * On X11, this is a special program that works according to the freedesktop clipboard specification, * available at http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/clipboard-manager-spec. - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param clipboard_window A Gdk::Window belonging to the clipboard owner. * @param time_ A timestamp. */ @@ -746,8 +651,6 @@ public: /** Returns true if Gdk::Window::shape_combine_mask() can * be used to create shaped windows on @a display. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if shaped windows are supported. */ bool supports_shapes() const; @@ -755,8 +658,6 @@ public: /** Returns true if Gdk::Window::input_shape_combine_mask() can * be used to modify the input shape of windows on @a display. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if windows with modified input shape are supported. */ bool supports_input_shapes() const; @@ -767,8 +668,6 @@ public: * Currently this only works on X11 with XComposite and * XDamage extensions available. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return true if windows may be composited. */ bool supports_composite() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/displaymanager.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/displaymanager.h index 9eb446457b..b902474c51 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/displaymanager.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/displaymanager.h @@ -105,8 +105,6 @@ public: /** Gets the singleton Gdk::DisplayManager object. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The global Gdk::DisplayManager singleton; gdk_parse_pargs(), * gdk_init(), or gdk_init_check() must have been called first. @@ -114,8 +112,6 @@ public: static Glib::RefPtr get(); /** Gets the default Gdk::Display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return A Gdk::Display, or 0 if there is no default * display. @@ -123,8 +119,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_default_display(); /** Gets the default Gdk::Display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return A Gdk::Display, or 0 if there is no default * display. @@ -133,8 +127,6 @@ public: /** Sets @a display as the default display. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param display A Gdk::Display. */ @@ -142,8 +134,6 @@ public: /** List all currently open displays. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return A list of Gdk::Display objects. */ @@ -165,8 +155,6 @@ public: /** The display_opened signal is emitted when a display is opened. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param display the opened display * diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/dragcontext.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/dragcontext.h index 6a1b174116..6cabac714c 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/dragcontext.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/dragcontext.h @@ -308,16 +308,12 @@ public: /** Returns the Gdk::Window where the DND operation started. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::Window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_source_window(); /** Returns the Gdk::Window where the DND operation started. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::Window. */ @@ -345,15 +341,11 @@ public: /** Determines the bitmask of actions proposed by the source if * gdk_drag_context_suggested_action() returns GDK_ACTION_ASK. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return The Gdk::DragAction flags. */ DragAction get_actions() const; /** Determines the suggested drag action of the context. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::DragAction value. */ @@ -363,8 +355,6 @@ public: #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Determines the action chosen by the drag destination. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @deprecated Use get_selected_action() * @@ -375,8 +365,6 @@ public: /** Determines the action chosen by the drag destination. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::DragAction value. */ @@ -394,8 +382,6 @@ public: * This function is called by the drag source to obtain the * @a dest_window and @a protocol parameters for gdk_drag_motion(). * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param drag_window A window which may be at the pointer position, but * should be ignored, since it is put up by the drag source as an icon. * @param screen The screen where the destination window is sought. diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/drawable.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/drawable.h index c9e169ab8e..d337f71427 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/drawable.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/drawable.h @@ -573,8 +573,6 @@ public: * support can be turned off by setting the GDK_DISABLE_MEDIALIB environment * variable. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param gc A Gdk::GC, used for clipping. * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf. * @param src_x Source X coordinate within pixbuf. @@ -609,7 +607,6 @@ public: * support can be turned off by setting the GDK_DISABLE_MEDIALIB environment * variable. * - * @newin{2,16} * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf. * @param src_x Source X coordinate within pixbuf. * @param src_y Source Y coordinates within pixbuf. @@ -757,8 +754,6 @@ public: #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Gets the Gdk::Screen associated with a Gdk::Drawable. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use Gdk::Window::get_screen() instead * @@ -771,8 +766,6 @@ public: #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Gets the Gdk::Screen associated with a Gdk::Drawable. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use Gdk::Window::get_screen() instead * @@ -785,8 +778,6 @@ public: #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with a Gdk::Drawable. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use Gdk::Window::get_display() instead * @@ -799,8 +790,6 @@ public: #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with a Gdk::Drawable. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use Gdk::Window::get_display() instead * @@ -813,8 +802,6 @@ public: /** Creates a Cairo context for drawing to @a drawable. * * @return A newly created Cairo context. - * - * @newin{2,10}. */ Cairo::RefPtr create_cairo_context(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/event.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/event.h index 26a6f61b8e..c4d091da36 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/event.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/event.h @@ -341,8 +341,6 @@ public: * have been allocated by GTK+, for instance, by * copy(). * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen. */ void set_screen(const Glib::RefPtr& screen); @@ -355,8 +353,6 @@ public: * to which event->motion.x_root and * event->motion.y_root are relative. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The screen for the event. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen(); @@ -369,8 +365,6 @@ public: * to which event->motion.x_root and * event->motion.y_root are relative. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The screen for the event. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/gc.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/gc.h index 9d716f90af..b2e072cdb9 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/gc.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/gc.h @@ -697,16 +697,12 @@ public: /** Gets the Gdk::Screen for which @a gc was created - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The Gdk::Screen for @a gc. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen(); /** Gets the Gdk::Screen for which @a gc was created - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The Gdk::Screen for @a gc. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/general.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/general.h index 4bb98478d2..40dd9803da 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/general.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/general.h @@ -44,8 +44,6 @@ namespace Cairo * * @deprecated Use the overloaded function that takes a const RefPtr * reference. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void set_source_color(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Color& color); #endif @@ -53,8 +51,6 @@ void set_source_color(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::C /** Sets the specified Gdk::Color as the source color of the Cairo context. * @param @context The cairo context. * @param color The color to use as the source color. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void set_source_color(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Color& color); @@ -67,8 +63,6 @@ void set_source_color(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const * * @deprecated Use the overloaded function that takes a const RefPtr * reference. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void set_source_pixbuf(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib::RefPtr& pixbuf, double pixbuf_x = 0, double pixbuf_y = 0); #endif @@ -78,8 +72,6 @@ void set_source_pixbuf(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib: * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf * @param pixbuf_x X coordinate of location to place upper left corner of pixbuf. * @param pixbuf_y Y coordinate of location to place upper left corner of pixbuf. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void set_source_pixbuf(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib::RefPtr& pixbuf, double pixbuf_x = 0, double pixbuf_y = 0); @@ -92,8 +84,6 @@ void set_source_pixbuf(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const * * @deprecated Use the overloaded function that takes a const RefPtr * reference. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void set_source_pixmap(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib::RefPtr& pixmap, double pixmap_x, double pixmap_y); #endif @@ -103,8 +93,6 @@ void set_source_pixmap(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib: * @param pixmap A Gdk::Pixmap * @param pixmap_x X coordinate of location to place upper left corner of pixmap. * @param pixmap_y Y coordinate of location to place upper left corner of pixmap. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void set_source_pixmap(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib::RefPtr& pixmap, double pixmap_x, double pixmap_y); @@ -116,8 +104,6 @@ void set_source_pixmap(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const * * @deprecated Use add_rectangle_to_path() instead * reference. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void rectangle(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Rectangle& rectangle); #endif @@ -126,8 +112,6 @@ void rectangle(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Rectangl * * @param context A cairo context. * @param rectangle A rectangle to add to the path of the context. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void add_rectangle_to_path(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Rectangle& rectangle); @@ -138,8 +122,6 @@ void add_rectangle_to_path(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, c * @param region A region to add to the path of the context. * * @deprecated Use add_region_to_path() instead - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void region(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Region& region); #endif @@ -148,8 +130,6 @@ void region(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Region& reg * * @param context A cairo context. * @param region A region to add to the path of the context. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void add_region_to_path(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Region& region); diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/image.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/image.h index 225d740fd9..0ebcb31bcf 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/image.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/image.h @@ -202,8 +202,6 @@ public: /** Determines the type of a given image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -212,8 +210,6 @@ public: ImageType get_image_type() const; /** Determines the visual that was used to create the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -222,8 +218,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_visual(); /** Determines the visual that was used to create the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -232,8 +226,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_visual() const; /** Determines the byte order of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -242,8 +234,6 @@ public: ByteOrder get_byte_order() const; /** Determines the width of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -252,8 +242,6 @@ public: int get_width() const; /** Determines the height of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -262,8 +250,6 @@ public: int get_height() const; /** Determines the depth of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -275,8 +261,6 @@ public: #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Determines the number of bytes per pixel of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -289,8 +273,6 @@ public: /** Determines the number of bytes per pixel of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -302,8 +284,6 @@ public: #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Determines the number of bytes per line of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -316,8 +296,6 @@ public: /** Determines the number of bytes per line of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -327,8 +305,6 @@ public: /** Determines the number of bits per pixel of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -338,8 +314,6 @@ public: /** Returns a pointer to the pixel data of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * @@ -348,8 +322,6 @@ public: void* get_pixels(); /** Returns a pointer to the pixel data of the image. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore. * diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbuf.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbuf.h index ddeb026ccd..de9e75cc99 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbuf.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbuf.h @@ -349,8 +349,6 @@ protected: * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within drawable. * @param width Width in pixels of region to get. * @param height Height in pixels of region to get. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ Pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr& src, const Glib::RefPtr& cmap, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height); @@ -362,8 +360,6 @@ protected: * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within drawable. * @param width Width in pixels of region to get. * @param height Height in pixels of region to get. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ Pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr& src, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height); @@ -384,8 +380,6 @@ protected: * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within the image. * @param width Width in pixels of region to get. * @param height Height in pixels of region to get. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ Pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr& src, const Glib::RefPtr& cmap, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height); @@ -397,8 +391,6 @@ protected: * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within the image. * @param width Width in pixels of region to get. * @param height Height in pixels of region to get. - * - * @newinp212 */ Pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr& src, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height); @@ -479,8 +471,6 @@ public: * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within drawable. * @param width Width in pixels of region to get. * @param height Height in pixels of region to get. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ static Glib::RefPtr create(const Glib::RefPtr& src, const Glib::RefPtr& cmap, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height); @@ -493,8 +483,6 @@ public: * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within drawable. * @param width Width in pixels of region to get. * @param height Height in pixels of region to get. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ static Glib::RefPtr create(const Glib::RefPtr& src, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height); @@ -508,8 +496,6 @@ public: * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within the image. * @param width Width in pixels of region to get. * @param height Height in pixels of region to get. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ static Glib::RefPtr create(const Glib::RefPtr& src, const Glib::RefPtr& cmap, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height); @@ -522,8 +508,6 @@ public: * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within the image. * @param width Width in pixels of region to get. * @param height Height in pixels of region to get. - * - * @newinp212 */ static Glib::RefPtr create(const Glib::RefPtr& src, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height); diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbufanimationiter.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbufanimationiter.h index 714b96388b..126057c463 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbufanimationiter.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbufanimationiter.h @@ -112,8 +112,6 @@ public: * conveniently takes a timeout in milliseconds, so you can use a timeout * to schedule the next update. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return Delay time in milliseconds (thousandths of a second). */ int get_delay_time() const; @@ -128,8 +126,6 @@ public: * advance(). Copy the pixbuf to keep it, with * Gdk::Pixbuf::copy() as it may get recycled as you advance the iterator. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The pixbuf to be displayed. */ Glib::RefPtr get_pixbuf(); @@ -143,8 +139,6 @@ public: * advance(). Copy the pixbuf to keep it, with * Gdk::Pixbuf::copy() as it may get recycled as you advance the iterator. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The pixbuf to be displayed. */ Glib::RefPtr get_pixbuf() const; @@ -156,8 +150,6 @@ public: * you're on the currently loading frame, you need to redraw the screen for * the updated area. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return true if the frame we're on is partially loaded, or the last frame. */ bool on_currently_loading_frame() const; @@ -183,8 +175,6 @@ public: * if true, you need to call get_pixbuf() and update the * display with the new pixbuf. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param current_time Current time. * @return true if the image may need updating. */ @@ -198,8 +188,6 @@ public: * if true, you need to call get_pixbuf() and update the * display with the new pixbuf. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return true if the image may need updating. */ bool advance(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/screen.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/screen.h index 51690fb893..3e6295e2a1 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/screen.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/screen.h @@ -116,16 +116,12 @@ protected: public: /** Gets the default colormap for @a screen. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The default Gdk::Colormap. */ Glib::RefPtr get_default_colormap(); /** Gets the default colormap for @a screen. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The default Gdk::Colormap. */ @@ -133,24 +129,18 @@ public: /** Sets the default @a colormap for @a screen. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param colormap A Gdk::Colormap. */ void set_default_colormap(const Glib::RefPtr& colormap); /** Gets the system's default colormap for @a screen - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The default colormap for @a screen. */ Glib::RefPtr get_system_colormap(); /** Gets the system's default colormap for @a screen - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The default colormap for @a screen. */ @@ -161,8 +151,6 @@ public: * This is the visual for the root window of the display. * The return value should not be freed. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The system visual. */ Glib::RefPtr get_system_visual(); @@ -171,8 +159,6 @@ public: * This is the visual for the root window of the display. * The return value should not be freed. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The system visual. */ Glib::RefPtr get_system_visual() const; @@ -184,8 +170,6 @@ public: * it can render to any colormap and visual. So there's no need to * call this function. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_system_colormap() * * @return The preferred colormap. @@ -198,8 +182,6 @@ public: * it can render to any colormap and visual. So there's no need to * call this function. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_system_colormap() * * @return The preferred colormap. @@ -214,8 +196,6 @@ public: * the optimal one in those previous versions. GdkRGB can now render to * drawables with any visual. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_system_visual() * * @return The Gdk::Visual chosen by GdkRGB. @@ -229,8 +209,6 @@ public: * the optimal one in those previous versions. GdkRGB can now render to * drawables with any visual. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_system_visual() * * @return The Gdk::Visual chosen by GdkRGB. @@ -252,8 +230,6 @@ public: * For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see * Gdk::Window::set_opacity(). * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return A colormap to use for windows with * an alpha channel or 0 if the capability is not available. */ @@ -273,8 +249,6 @@ public: * For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see * Gdk::Window::set_opacity(). * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return A colormap to use for windows with * an alpha channel or 0 if the capability is not available. */ @@ -285,8 +259,6 @@ public: * alpha channel. See the docs for get_rgba_colormap() * for caveats. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return A visual to use for windows with an * alpha channel or 0 if the capability is not available. */ @@ -296,8 +268,6 @@ public: * alpha channel. See the docs for get_rgba_colormap() * for caveats. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return A visual to use for windows with an * alpha channel or 0 if the capability is not available. */ @@ -311,8 +281,6 @@ public: * On X11 this function returns whether a compositing manager is * compositing @a screen. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return Whether windows with RGBA visuals can reasonably be * expected to have their alpha channels drawn correctly on the screen. */ @@ -320,16 +288,12 @@ public: /** Gets the root window of @a screen. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The root window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_root_window(); /** Gets the root window of @a screen. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The root window. */ @@ -337,16 +301,12 @@ public: /** Gets the display to which the @a screen belongs. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The display to which @a screen belongs. */ Glib::RefPtr get_display(); /** Gets the display to which the @a screen belongs. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The display to which @a screen belongs. */ @@ -356,23 +316,17 @@ public: /** Gets the index of @a screen among the screens in the display * to which it belongs. (See get_display()) * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The index. */ int get_number() const; /** Gets the width of @a screen in pixels - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The width of @a screen in pixels. */ int get_width() const; /** Gets the height of @a screen in pixels - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The height of @a screen in pixels. */ @@ -381,8 +335,6 @@ public: /** Gets the width of @a screen in millimeters. * Note that on some X servers this value will not be correct. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The width of @a screen in millimeters. */ int get_width_mm() const; @@ -390,8 +342,6 @@ public: /** Returns the height of @a screen in millimeters. * Note that on some X servers this value will not be correct. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The heigth of @a screen in millimeters. */ int get_height_mm() const; @@ -401,8 +351,6 @@ public: * A visual describes a hardware image data format. * For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color, * and might expect pixels to be in a certain format. - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return A list of visuals. */ Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr > list_visuals(); @@ -411,8 +359,6 @@ public: /** Obtains a list of all toplevel windows known to GDK on the screen @a screen. * A toplevel window is a child of the root window (see * gdk_get_default_root_window()). - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return List of toplevel windows. */ Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr > get_toplevel_windows(); @@ -421,16 +367,12 @@ public: /** Determines the name to pass to Gdk::Display::open() to get * a Gdk::Display with this screen as the default screen. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The name. */ Glib::ustring make_display_name(); /** Returns the number of monitors which @a screen consists of. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return Number of monitors which @a screen consists of. */ @@ -445,8 +387,6 @@ public: * If no primary monitor is configured by the user, the return value * will be 0, defaulting to the first monitor. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return An integer index for the primary monitor, or 0 if none is configured. */ int get_primary_monitor() const; @@ -457,16 +397,12 @@ public: * Note that the size of the entire screen area can be retrieved via * get_width() and get_height(). * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param monitor_num The monitor number, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen). * @param dest A Gdk::Rectangle to be filled with the monitor geometry. */ void get_monitor_geometry(int monitor_num, Rectangle& dest) const; /** Returns the monitor number in which the point ( @a x, @a y) is located. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param x The x coordinate in the virtual screen. * @param y The y coordinate in the virtual screen. @@ -478,8 +414,6 @@ public: /** Returns the number of the monitor in which the largest area of the * bounding rectangle of @a window resides. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param window A Gdk::Window. * @return The monitor number in which most of @a window is located, * or if @a window does not intersect any monitors, a monitor, @@ -489,8 +423,6 @@ public: /** Gets the width in millimeters of the specified monitor, if available. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @param monitor_num Number of the monitor, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen). * @return The width of the monitor, or -1 if not available. @@ -498,8 +430,6 @@ public: int get_monitor_width_mm(int monitor_num) const; /** Gets the height in millimeters of the specified monitor. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @param monitor_num Number of the monitor, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen). * @return The height of the monitor, or -1 if not available. @@ -510,8 +440,6 @@ public: * Usually something like VGA, DVI, or TV, not the actual * product name of the display device. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param monitor_num Number of the monitor, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen). * @return A newly-allocated string containing the name of the monitor, * or 0 if the name cannot be determined. @@ -531,8 +459,6 @@ public: * GDK_WIN32_CLIENT_MESSAGE to all top-level windows. The amount of * data is limited to one long, i.e. four bytes. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param event The Gdk::Event. */ void broadcast_client_message(GdkEvent* event); @@ -541,8 +467,6 @@ public: /** Gets the default screen for the default display. (See * Gdk::Display::get_default()). * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return A Gdk::Screen, or 0 if there is no default display. */ static Glib::RefPtr get_default(); @@ -557,8 +481,6 @@ public: * default set of font options does not affect contexts that * have already been created. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param options A #cairo_font_options_t, or 0 to unset any * previously set default font options. */ @@ -568,8 +490,6 @@ public: /** Gets any options previously set with set_font_options(). - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The current font options, or 0 if no default * font options have been set. @@ -582,8 +502,6 @@ public: * and cairo units. The default value is 96, meaning that a 10 point * font will be 13 units high. (10 * 96. / 72. = 13.3). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param dpi The resolution in "dots per inch". (Physical inches aren't actually * involved; the terminology is conventional.). */ @@ -592,8 +510,6 @@ public: /** Gets the resolution for font handling on the screen; see * set_resolution() for full details. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The current resolution, or -1 if no resolution * has been set. */ @@ -614,8 +530,6 @@ public: * The returned window should be unrefed using Glib::object_unref() when * no longer needed. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The currently active window, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_active_window(); @@ -634,8 +548,6 @@ public: * The returned window should be unrefed using Glib::object_unref() when * no longer needed. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The currently active window, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_active_window() const; @@ -656,8 +568,6 @@ public: * windows it contains, so it should be freed using Glib::list_free() and * its windows unrefed using Glib::object_unref() when no longer needed. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A list of Gdk::Windows for the current window stack, * or 0. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/visual.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/visual.h index d37fa67320..4c432121f3 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/visual.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/visual.h @@ -225,16 +225,12 @@ public: /** Gets the screen to which this visual belongs - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The screen to which this visual belongs. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen(); /** Gets the screen to which this visual belongs - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The screen to which this visual belongs. */ @@ -242,40 +238,30 @@ public: /** Returns the type of visual this is (PseudoColor, TrueColor, etc). - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::VisualType stating the type of @a visual. */ VisualType get_visual_type() const; /** Returns the bit depth of this visual. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return The bit depth of this visual. */ int get_depth() const; /** Returns the byte order of this visual. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::ByteOrder stating the byte order of @a visual. */ ByteOrder get_byte_order(); /** Returns the size of a colormap for this visual. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return The size of a colormap that is suitable for @a visual. */ int get_colormap_size() const; /** Returns the number of significant bits per red, green and blue value. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return The number of significant bits per color value for @a visual. */ @@ -287,8 +273,6 @@ public: * to be in position (according to the "mask"). Finally, "precision" refers * to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param mask A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or 0. * @param shift A pointer to a int to be filled in, or 0. * @param precision A pointer to a int to be filled in, or 0. @@ -301,8 +285,6 @@ public: * to be in position (according to the "mask"). Finally, "precision" refers * to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param mask A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or 0. * @param shift A pointer to a int to be filled in, or 0. * @param precision A pointer to a int to be filled in, or 0. @@ -315,8 +297,6 @@ public: * to be in position (according to the "mask"). Finally, "precision" refers * to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param mask A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or 0. * @param shift A pointer to a int to be filled in, or 0. * @param precision A pointer to a int to be filled in, or 0. diff --git a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/window.h b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/window.h index 252cc5fcce..8cd0cfeaaa 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/window.h +++ b/libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/window.h @@ -771,16 +771,12 @@ public: /** Gets the Gdk::Visual describing the pixel format of @a window. - * - * @newin{2,24} * * @return A Gdk::Visual. */ Glib::RefPtr get_visual(); /** Gets the Gdk::Visual describing the pixel format of @a window. - * - * @newin{2,24} * * @return A Gdk::Visual. */ @@ -801,16 +797,12 @@ public: /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with a Gdk::Window. - * - * @newin{2,24} * * @return The Gdk::Display associated with @a window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_display(); /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with a Gdk::Window. - * - * @newin{2,24} * * @return The Gdk::Display associated with @a window. */ @@ -962,8 +954,6 @@ public: * request to move the window in the Z-order, restack() only * requests the restack, does not guarantee it. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param sibling A Gdk::Window that is a sibling of @a window, or 0. * @param above A boolean. */ @@ -977,8 +967,6 @@ public: * requests the restack but does not guarantee it. * * @param above Whether to raise or lower the window. - * - * @newin{2,18} */ void restack(bool above); @@ -1054,8 +1042,6 @@ public: * * Child windows are not moved. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param region The Gdk::Region to move. * @param dx Amount to move in the X direction. * @param dy Amount to move in the Y direction. @@ -1069,8 +1055,6 @@ public: * * Some backends may not support native child windows. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the window has a native window, false otherwise. */ bool ensure_native(); @@ -1133,8 +1117,6 @@ public: * * See set_composited(). * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return true if the window is composited. */ bool get_composited() const; @@ -1163,8 +1145,6 @@ public: * setting a window as composited is supported before * attempting to do so. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param composited true to set the window as composited. */ void set_composited(bool composited = TRUE); @@ -1198,8 +1178,6 @@ public: * On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the * function does nothing. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param mask Shape mask, or 0. * @param x X position of shape mask with respect to @a window. * @param y Y position of shape mask with respect to @a window. @@ -1223,8 +1201,6 @@ public: * On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the * function does nothing. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param shape_region Region of window to be non-transparent. * @param offset_x X position of @a shape_region in @a window coordinates. * @param offset_y Y position of @a shape_region in @a window coordinates. @@ -1235,8 +1211,6 @@ public: * for all children of @a window, ignoring the input shape mask of @a window * itself. Contrast with merge_child_input_shapes() which includes * the input shape mask of @a window in the masks to be merged. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void set_child_input_shapes(); @@ -1248,8 +1222,6 @@ public: * This function is distinct from set_child_input_shapes() * because it includes @a window's input shape mask in the set of * shapes to be merged. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void merge_child_input_shapes(); @@ -1271,16 +1243,12 @@ public: bool is_viewable() const; /** Determines whether or not the window is an input only window. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return true if @a window is input only. */ bool is_input_only() const; /** Determines whether or not the window is shaped. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return true if @a window is shaped. */ @@ -1306,8 +1274,6 @@ public: /** Checks whether the window has a native window or not. Note that * you can use ensure_native() if a native window is needed. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return true if the %window has a native window, false otherwise. */ bool has_native() const; @@ -1324,8 +1290,6 @@ public: void set_type_hint(WindowTypeHint hint); /** This function returns the type hint set for a window. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The type hint set for @a window. */ @@ -1334,8 +1298,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether or not the window manager is hinted that @a window * has modal behaviour. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return Whether or not the window has the modal hint set. */ bool get_modal_hint() const; @@ -1473,8 +1435,6 @@ public: * be needed if you for instance mix direct native drawing with * gdk drawing. For Gtk widgets that don't use double buffering this * will be called automatically before sending the expose event. - * - * @newin{2,18} */ void flush(); @@ -1508,8 +1468,6 @@ public: /** When using GTK+, typically you should use gtk_window_set_startup_id() * instead of this low-level function. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param startup_id A string with startup-notification identifier. */ void set_startup_id(const Glib::ustring& startup_id); @@ -1564,7 +1522,6 @@ public: * the display. * * @see set_back_pixmap(). - * @newin{2,14} */ void unset_back_pixmap(); @@ -1573,8 +1530,6 @@ public: * does not have its own background and reuses the parent's, 0 is * returned and you'll have to query it yourself. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return The pattern to use for the background or * 0 to use the parent's background. */ @@ -1585,8 +1540,6 @@ public: * does not have its own background and reuses the parent's, 0 is * returned and you'll have to query it yourself. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return The pattern to use for the background or * 0 to use the parent's background. */ @@ -1656,8 +1609,6 @@ public: * most-recently-processed configure event, rather than the current * size on the X server. * - * @newin{2,24} - * * @return The width of @a window. */ int get_width() const; @@ -1668,8 +1619,6 @@ public: * most-recently-processed configure event, rather than the current * size on the X server. * - * @newin{2,24} - * * @return The height of @a window. */ int get_height() const; @@ -1703,8 +1652,6 @@ public: * get_origin() but allows you go pass * in any position in the window, not just the origin. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param x X coordinate in window. * @param y Y coordinate in window. * @param root_x Return location for X coordinate. @@ -1729,8 +1676,6 @@ public: * * See also: coords_from_parent() * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param x X coordinate in child's coordinate system. * @param y Y coordinate in child's coordinate system. * @param parent_x Return location for X coordinate @@ -1757,8 +1702,6 @@ public: * * See also: coords_to_parent() * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param parent_x X coordinate in parent's coordinate system. * @param parent_y Y coordinate in parent's coordinate system. * @param x Return location for X coordinate in child's coordinate system. @@ -1869,8 +1812,6 @@ public: * * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder() * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return Effective parent of @a window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_effective_parent(); @@ -1881,8 +1822,6 @@ public: * * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder() * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return Effective parent of @a window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_effective_parent() const; @@ -1894,8 +1833,6 @@ public: * * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder() * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return The effective toplevel window containing @a window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_effective_toplevel(); @@ -2002,16 +1939,12 @@ public: void set_group(const Glib::RefPtr& leader); /** Returns the group leader window for @a window. See set_group(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The group leader window for @a window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_group(); /** Returns the group leader window for @a window. See set_group(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The group leader window for @a window. */ @@ -2086,8 +2019,6 @@ public: * Initially the surface contents are all 0 (transparent if contents * have transparency, black otherwise.) * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param content The content for the new surface. * @param width Width of the new surface. * @param height Height of the new surface. @@ -2105,8 +2036,6 @@ public: /** Emits a short beep associated to @a window in the appropriate * display, if supported. Otherwise, emits a short beep on * the display just as Gdk::Display::beep(). - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void beep(); @@ -2208,8 +2137,6 @@ public: * @param window The source window for this drag. * @param targets A list of the offered targets names. * @return A newly created Gdk::DragContext. - * - * @newin{2,24} */ Glib::RefPtr drag_begin(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& targets); @@ -2345,8 +2272,6 @@ public: * * On X, calling this function makes @a window participate in the * _NET_WM_SYNC_REQUEST window manager protocol. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ void enable_synchronized_configure(); @@ -2358,8 +2283,6 @@ public: * * This function can only be called if enable_synchronized_configure() * was called previously. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ void configure_finished(); @@ -2371,8 +2294,6 @@ public: * instead you should allow the window to be treated according to * standard policy for its semantic type. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param skips_taskbar true to skip the taskbar. */ void set_skip_taskbar_hint(bool skips_taskbar = true); @@ -2386,8 +2307,6 @@ public: * allow the window to be treated according to standard policy for * its semantic type. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param skips_pager true to skip the pager. */ void set_skip_pager_hint(bool skips_pager = true); @@ -2396,8 +2315,6 @@ public: /** Toggles whether a window needs the user's * urgent attention. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param urgent true if the window is urgent. */ void set_urgency_hint(bool urgent = true); @@ -2416,8 +2333,6 @@ public: * fullscreenification actually happening. But it will happen with * most standard window managers, and GDK makes a best effort to get * it to happen. - * - * @newin{2,2} */ void fullscreen(); @@ -2431,8 +2346,6 @@ public: * unfullscreenification actually happening. But it will happen with * most standard window managers, and GDK makes a best effort to get * it to happen. - * - * @newin{2,2} */ void unfullscreen(); @@ -2490,8 +2403,6 @@ public: * But it will happen with most standard window managers, * and GDK makes a best effort to get it to happen. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param setting Whether to keep @a window above other windows. */ void set_keep_above(bool setting = true); @@ -2506,8 +2417,6 @@ public: * But it will happen with most standard window managers, * and GDK makes a best effort to get it to happen. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param setting Whether to keep @a window below other windows. */ void set_keep_below(bool setting = true); @@ -2524,8 +2433,6 @@ public: * For making non-toplevel windows translucent, see * set_composited(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param opacity Opacity. */ void set_opacity(double opacity); @@ -2534,8 +2441,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether or not the desktop environment shuld be hinted that * the window does not want to receive input focus. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return Whether or not the window should receive input focus. */ bool get_accept_focus() const; @@ -2546,8 +2451,6 @@ public: * On X, it is the responsibility of the window manager to interpret this * hint. ICCCM-compliant window manager usually respect it. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param accept_focus true if the window should receive input focus. */ void set_accept_focus(bool accept_focus = true); @@ -2556,8 +2459,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether or not the desktop environment should be hinted that the * window does not want to receive input focus when it is mapped. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return Whether or not the window wants to receive input focus when * it is mapped. */ @@ -2572,8 +2473,6 @@ public: * this hint. %Window managers following the freedesktop.org window * manager extension specification should respect it. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param focus_on_map true if the window should receive input focus when mapped. */ void set_focus_on_map(bool focus_on_map); @@ -2591,8 +2490,6 @@ public: * If you need to keep this around over window resizes, you need to * add a reference to it. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param window A Gdk::Window. * @return The offscreen pixmap, or 0 if not offscreen. */ @@ -2602,8 +2499,6 @@ public: * If you need to keep this around over window resizes, you need to * add a reference to it. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param window A Gdk::Window. * @return The offscreen pixmap, or 0 if not offscreen. */ @@ -2611,8 +2506,6 @@ public: /** Gets the window that @a window is embedded in. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param window A Gdk::Window. * @return The embedding Gdk::Window, or 0 if @a window is not an @@ -2621,8 +2514,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_offscreen_embedder(); /** Gets the window that @a window is embedded in. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param window A Gdk::Window. * @return The embedding Gdk::Window, or 0 if @a window is not an @@ -2638,8 +2529,6 @@ public: * signal on the @a embedder and the Gdk::Window::signal_to_embedder() and * Gdk::Window::signal_from_embedder() signals on @a window. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param window A Gdk::Window. * @param embedder The Gdk::Window that @a window gets embedded in. */ @@ -2658,8 +2547,6 @@ public: * Redirection is active until remove_redirection() * is called. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param drawable A Gdk::Drawable. * @param src_x X position in @a window. * @param src_y Y position in @a window. @@ -2672,8 +2559,6 @@ public: /** Removes any active redirection started by * redirect_to_drawable(). - * - * @newin{2,14} */ void remove_redirection(); @@ -2681,8 +2566,6 @@ public: /** This function informs GDK that the geometry of an embedded * offscreen window has changed. This is necessary for GDK to keep * track of which offscreen window the pointer is in. - * - * @newin{2,18} */ void geometry_changed(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/aboutdialog.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/aboutdialog.h index 6e4bd2c093..2f156ca564 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/aboutdialog.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/aboutdialog.h @@ -122,8 +122,6 @@ public: #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Returns the program name displayed in the about dialog. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * Deprecated: 2.12: Use get_program_name() instead. * @@ -139,8 +137,6 @@ public: /** Sets the name to display in the about dialog. * If this is not set, it defaults to Glib::get_application_name(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * Deprecated: 2.12: Use set_program_name() instead. * * @param name The program name. @@ -152,24 +148,18 @@ public: /** Return value: The program name. * * @return The program name. - * - * @newin{2,12}. */ Glib::ustring get_program_name() const; /** Sets the name to display in the about dialog. * If this is not set, it defaults to Glib::get_application_name(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param name The program name. */ void set_program_name(const Glib::ustring& name); /** Returns the version string. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The version string. The string is owned by the about * dialog and must not be modified. @@ -177,16 +167,12 @@ public: Glib::ustring get_version() const; /** Sets the version string to display in the about dialog. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param version The version string. */ void set_version(const Glib::ustring& version); /** Returns the copyright string. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The copyright string. The string is owned by the about * dialog and must not be modified. @@ -196,15 +182,11 @@ public: /** Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog. * This should be a short string of one or two lines. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param copyright (allow-none) the copyright string. */ void set_copyright(const Glib::ustring& copyright); /** Returns the comments string. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The comments. The string is owned by the about * dialog and must not be modified. @@ -214,15 +196,11 @@ public: /** Sets the comments string to display in the about dialog. * This should be a short string of one or two lines. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param comments A comments string. */ void set_comments(const Glib::ustring& comments); /** Returns the license information. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The license information. The string is owned by the about * dialog and must not be modified. @@ -233,15 +211,11 @@ public: * license dialog. If @a license is 0, the license button is * hidden. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param license The license information or 0. */ void set_license(const Glib::ustring& license); /** Returns the website URL. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The website URL. The string is owned by the about * dialog and must not be modified. @@ -253,8 +227,6 @@ public: * Note that that the hook functions need to be set up * before calling this function. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param website A URL string starting with "http://". */ void set_website(const Glib::ustring& website); @@ -262,16 +234,12 @@ public: /** Return value: The label used for the website link. * * @return The label used for the website link. - * - * @newin{2,6}. */ Glib::ustring get_website_label() const; /** Sets the label to be used for the website link. * It defaults to the website URL. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param website_label The label used for the website link. */ void set_website_label(const Glib::ustring& website_label); @@ -280,8 +248,6 @@ public: /** Returns the string which are displayed in the authors tab * of the secondary credits dialog. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return A 0-terminated string array containing * the authors. The array is owned by the about dialog * and must not be modified. @@ -292,8 +258,6 @@ public: /** Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab * of the secondary credits dialog. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param authors A 0-terminated array of strings. */ void set_authors(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& authors) const; @@ -302,8 +266,6 @@ public: /** Returns the string which are displayed in the documenters * tab of the secondary credits dialog. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return A 0-terminated string array containing * the documenters. The array is owned by the about dialog * and must not be modified. @@ -314,8 +276,6 @@ public: /** Sets the strings which are displayed in the documenters tab * of the secondary credits dialog. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param documenters A 0-terminated array of strings. */ void set_documenters(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& documenters); @@ -323,8 +283,6 @@ public: /** Returns the string which are displayed in the artists tab * of the secondary credits dialog. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return A 0-terminated string array containing * the artists. The array is owned by the about dialog * and must not be modified. @@ -334,8 +292,6 @@ public: /** Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab * of the secondary credits dialog. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param artists A 0-terminated array of strings. */ void set_artists(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& artists); @@ -343,8 +299,6 @@ public: /** Returns the translator credits string which is displayed * in the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The translator credits string. The string is * owned by the about dialog and must not be modified. */ @@ -364,16 +318,12 @@ public: * since Gtk::AboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated * and hide the tab. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param translator_credits The translator credits. */ void set_translator_credits(const Glib::ustring& translator_credits); /** Returns the pixbuf displayed as logo in the about dialog. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The pixbuf displayed as logo. The * pixbuf is owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a @@ -382,8 +332,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_logo(); /** Returns the pixbuf displayed as logo in the about dialog. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The pixbuf displayed as logo. The * pixbuf is owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a @@ -396,16 +344,12 @@ public: * If it is 0, the default window icon set with * Gtk::Window::set_default_icon() will be used. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param logo A Gdk::Pixbuf, or 0. */ void set_logo(const Glib::RefPtr& logo); /** Returns the icon name displayed as logo in the about dialog. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The icon name displayed as logo. The string is * owned by the dialog. If you want to keep a reference @@ -417,8 +361,6 @@ public: * If it is 0, the default window icon set with * Gtk::Window::set_default_icon() will be used. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param icon_name An icon name, or 0. */ void set_logo_icon_name(const Glib::ustring& icon_name); @@ -427,8 +369,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the license text in @a about is * automatically wrapped. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return true if the license text is wrapped. */ bool get_wrap_license() const; @@ -436,8 +376,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the license text in @a about is * automatically wrapped. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param wrap_license Whether to wrap the license. */ void set_wrap_license(bool wrap_license); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelgroup.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelgroup.h index 43ad1897e6..c994311657 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelgroup.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelgroup.h @@ -125,8 +125,6 @@ public: /** Locks are added and removed using lock() and * unlock(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return true if there are 1 or more locks on the @a accel_group, * false otherwise. */ @@ -135,8 +133,6 @@ public: /** Gets a Gdk::ModifierType representing the mask for this * @a accel_group. For example, Gdk::CONTROL_MASK, Gdk::SHIFT_MASK, etc. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The modifier mask for this accel group. */ Gdk::ModifierType get_modifier_mask() const; @@ -193,8 +189,6 @@ public: /** Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string * which can be used to represent the accelerator to the user. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param accelerator_key Accelerator keyval. * @param accelerator_mods Accelerator modifier mask. * @return A newly-allocated string representing the accelerator. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelmap.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelmap.h index 1186162e81..0aca40649a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelmap.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelmap.h @@ -107,8 +107,6 @@ void save(const std::string& filename); * have to be unlocked. * * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void lock_path(const std::string& accel_path); @@ -116,16 +114,12 @@ void lock_path(const std::string& accel_path); * about accelerator path locking. * * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void unlock_path(const std::string& accel_path); /** Looks up the accelerator entry for accel_path. * @param accel_path A valid accelerator path. * @result true if accel_path is known, false otherwise - * - * @newin{2,10} */ bool lookup_entry (const Glib::ustring& accel_path); @@ -133,8 +127,6 @@ bool lookup_entry (const Glib::ustring& accel_path); * @param accel_path A valid accelerator path. * @param key The accelerator key to be filled in. * @result true if accel_path is known, false otherwise - * - * @newin{2,10} */ bool lookup_entry (const Glib::ustring& accel_path, Gtk::AccelKey& key); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/action.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/action.h index d47d3cc928..b440571020 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/action.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/action.h @@ -209,8 +209,6 @@ public: /** Returns the name of the action. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The name of the action. The string belongs to GTK+ and should not * be freed. @@ -219,8 +217,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the action is effectively sensitive. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return true if the action and its associated action group * are both sensitive. @@ -231,8 +227,6 @@ public: * necessarily mean effective sensitivity. See is_sensitive() * for that. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the action itself is sensitive. */ bool get_sensitive() const; @@ -243,16 +237,12 @@ public: * is_sensitive() * for that. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param sensitive true to make the action sensitive. */ void set_sensitive(bool sensitive = true); /** Returns whether the action is effectively visible. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return true if the action and its associated action group * are both visible. @@ -263,8 +253,6 @@ public: * necessarily mean effective visibility. See is_sensitive() * for that. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the action itself is visible. */ bool get_visible() const; @@ -274,8 +262,6 @@ public: * is_visible() * for that. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param visible true to make the action visible. */ void set_visible(bool visible = true); @@ -286,32 +272,24 @@ public: * activated. * * It can also be used to manually activate an action. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void activate(); /** This function is intended for use by action implementations to * create icons displayed in the proxy widgets. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param icon_size The size of the icon that should be created. * @return A widget that displays the icon for this action. */ Image* create_icon(IconSize icon_size); /** Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A menu item connected to the action. */ MenuItem* create_menu_item(); /** Creates a toolbar item widget that proxies for the given action. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A toolbar item connected to the action. */ @@ -321,8 +299,6 @@ public: * item or the toolbar item it creates, this function returns an * instance of that menu. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The menu item provided by the * action, or 0. */ @@ -338,8 +314,6 @@ public: * If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected * first. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Activatable::set_related_action() instead. * * @param proxy The proxy widget. @@ -349,8 +323,6 @@ public: /** Disconnects a proxy widget from an action. * Does not destroy the widget, however. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Activatable::set_related_action() instead. * * @param proxy The proxy widget. @@ -361,8 +333,6 @@ public: /** Returns the proxy widgets for an action. * See also Gtk::Widget::get_action(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A SList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ * and must not be modified. */ @@ -371,8 +341,6 @@ public: /** Returns the proxy widgets for an action. * See also Gtk::Widget::get_action(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A SList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ * and must not be modified. */ @@ -387,21 +355,15 @@ public: * of the accelerator, the @a action counts the number of times this * function has been called and doesn't remove the accelerator until * disconnect_accelerator() has been called as many times. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void connect_accelerator(); /** Undoes the effect of one call to connect_accelerator(). - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void disconnect_accelerator(); /** Returns the accel path for this action. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The accel path for this action, or 0 * if none is set. The returned string is owned by GTK+ @@ -433,8 +395,6 @@ public: * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with * Glib::intern_static_string(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param accel_path The accelerator path. */ void set_accel_path(const Glib::ustring& accel_path); @@ -442,144 +402,108 @@ public: /** Sets the Gtk::AccelGroup in which the accelerator for this action * will be installed. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param accel_group A Gtk::AccelGroup or 0. */ void set_accel_group(const Glib::RefPtr& accel_group); /** Sets the label of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param label The label text to set. */ void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label); /** Gets the label text of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The label text. */ Glib::ustring get_label() const; /** Sets a shorter label text on @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param short_label The label text to set. */ void set_short_label(const Glib::ustring& short_label); /** Gets the short label text of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The short label text. */ Glib::ustring get_short_label() const; /** Sets the tooltip text on @a action - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param tooltip The tooltip text. */ void set_tooltip(const Glib::ustring& tooltip); /** Gets the tooltip text of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The tooltip text. */ Glib::ustring get_tooltip() const; /** Sets the stock id on @a action - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param stock_id The stock id. */ void set_stock_id(const StockID& stock_id); /** Gets the stock id of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The stock id. */ StockID get_stock_id() const; /** Sets the icon of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param icon The Icon to set. */ void set_gicon(const Glib::RefPtr& icon); /** Gets the gicon of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The action's Icon if one is set. */ Glib::RefPtr get_gicon(); /** Gets the gicon of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The action's Icon if one is set. */ Glib::RefPtr get_gicon() const; /** Sets the icon name on @a action - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param icon_name The icon name to set. */ void set_icon_name(const Glib::ustring& icon_name); /** Gets the icon name of @a action. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The icon name. */ Glib::ustring get_icon_name() const; /** Sets whether @a action is visible when horizontal - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param visible_horizontal Whether the action is visible horizontally. */ void set_visible_horizontal(bool visible_horizontal = true); /** Checks whether @a action is visible when horizontal - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return Whether @a action is visible when horizontal. */ bool get_visible_horizontal() const; /** Sets whether @a action is visible when vertical - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param visible_vertical Whether the action is visible vertically. */ void set_visible_vertical(bool visible_vertical = true); /** Checks whether @a action is visible when horizontal - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return Whether @a action is visible when horizontal. */ @@ -589,15 +513,11 @@ public: * primarily by toolbar items to decide whether to show a label * or not. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param is_important true to make the action important. */ void set_is_important(bool is_important = true); /** Checks whether @a action is important or not - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return Whether @a action is important. */ @@ -610,8 +530,6 @@ public: * Use this if the menu item would be useless or hard to use * without their image. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param always_show true if menuitem proxies should always show their image. */ void set_always_show_image(bool always_show = true); @@ -620,8 +538,6 @@ public: * Gtk::Settings::property_gtk_menu_images() setting and always show their image, * if available. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return true if the menu item proxies will always show their image. */ bool get_always_show_image() const; @@ -633,14 +549,10 @@ public: * Gtk::Activatable widget could result in calling activate(), * this is a convenience function to avoid recursing in those * cases (updating toggle state for instance). - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void block_activate(); /** Reenable activation signals from the action - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void unblock_activate(); @@ -876,8 +788,6 @@ protected: * * This function is intended for use by action implementations. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * Deprecated: 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the * action directly so this doesnt apply anymore. * @@ -891,8 +801,6 @@ protected: * * This function is intended for use by action implementations. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * Deprecated: 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the * action directly so this doesnt apply anymore. * diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/actiongroup.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/actiongroup.h index 3c979759b3..d88a0fc94f 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/actiongroup.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/actiongroup.h @@ -106,8 +106,6 @@ public: /** Gets the name of the action group. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The name of the action group. */ @@ -119,15 +117,11 @@ public: * they are sensitive (see get_sensitive()) and their group * is sensitive. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the group is sensitive. */ bool get_sensitive() const; /** Changes the sensitivity of @a action_group - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param sensitive New sensitivity. */ @@ -138,15 +132,11 @@ public: * they are visible (see get_visible()) and their group * is visible. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the group is visible. */ bool get_visible() const; /** Changes the visible of @a action_group. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param visible New visiblity. */ @@ -154,8 +144,6 @@ public: /** Looks up an action in the action group by name. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param action_name The name of the action. * @return The action, or 0 if no action by that name exists. @@ -163,8 +151,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_action(const Glib::ustring& action_name); /** Looks up an action in the action group by name. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param action_name The name of the action. * @return The action, or 0 if no action by that name exists. @@ -173,16 +159,12 @@ public: /** Lists the actions in the action group. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return An allocated list of the action objects in the action group. */ Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr > get_actions(); /** Lists the actions in the action group. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return An allocated list of the action objects in the action group. */ @@ -204,8 +186,6 @@ public: void add(const Glib::RefPtr& action, const AccelKey& accel_key, const Action::SlotActivate& slot); /** Removes an action object from the action group. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param action An action. */ @@ -216,8 +196,6 @@ public: /** Translates a string using the specified translate_func(). This * is mainly intended for language bindings. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param string A string. * @return The translation of @a string. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/activatable.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/activatable.h index cca8dcd13b..1c8ad564ee 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/activatable.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/activatable.h @@ -56,8 +56,6 @@ namespace Gtk /** Activatable widgets can be connected to a Gtk::Action and reflect the state * of the action. An Activatable can also provide feedback through its action, * as it is responsible for activating the related action. - * - * @newin{2,16} */ class Activatable : public Glib::Interface @@ -143,23 +141,17 @@ public: * copy of the Gtk::Action property, since this function uses * gtk_activatable_get_action() to retrieve the previous action * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param action The Gtk::Action to set. */ void do_set_related_action(const Glib::RefPtr& action); /** Gets the related Gtk::Action for @a activatable. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The related Gtk::Action if one is set. */ Glib::RefPtr get_related_action(); /** Gets the related Gtk::Action for @a activatable. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The related Gtk::Action if one is set. */ @@ -169,8 +161,6 @@ public: * and appearance when setting the related action or when * the action changes appearance. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @return Whether @a activatable uses its actions appearance. */ bool get_use_action_appearance() const; @@ -180,8 +170,6 @@ public: * or unset and by the implementing class when * Gtk::Activatable::signal_use_action_appearance() changes. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param action The related Gtk::Action or 0. */ void sync_action_properties(const Glib::RefPtr& action); @@ -191,8 +179,6 @@ public: * Gtk::Activatable implementors need to handle the Gtk::Activatable::property_related_action() * property and call do_set_related_action() when it changes. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param action The Gtk::Action to set. */ void set_related_action(const Glib::RefPtr& action); @@ -205,8 +191,6 @@ public: * sync_action_properties() to update @a activatable * if needed. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param use_appearance Whether to use the actions appearance. */ void set_use_action_appearance(bool use_appearance = true); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/adjustment.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/adjustment.h index a04b649ae2..358455a2b9 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/adjustment.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/adjustment.h @@ -179,15 +179,11 @@ public: * to change, or using configure() has the same effect * of compressing "changed" emissions. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param lower The new minimum value. */ void set_lower(double lower); /** Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The current minimum value of the adjustment. */ @@ -204,15 +200,11 @@ public: * emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment * properties. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param upper The new maximum value. */ void set_upper(double upper); /** Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The current maximum value of the adjustment. */ @@ -225,15 +217,11 @@ public: * emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment * properties. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param step_increment The new step increment. */ void set_step_increment(double step_increment); /** Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The current step increment of the adjustment. */ @@ -246,15 +234,11 @@ public: * emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment * properties. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param page_increment The new page increment. */ void set_page_increment(double page_increment); /** Retrieves the page increment of the adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The current page increment of the adjustment. */ @@ -267,15 +251,11 @@ public: * emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment * properties. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param page_size The new page size. */ void set_page_size(double page_size); /** Retrieves the page size of the adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The current page size of the adjustment. */ @@ -288,8 +268,6 @@ public: * signal. See set_lower() for an alternative way * of compressing multiple emissions of "changed" into one. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param value The new value. * @param lower The new minimum value. * @param upper The new maximum value. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/alignment.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/alignment.h index f23e2d4aad..28681ecf24 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/alignment.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/alignment.h @@ -157,8 +157,6 @@ public: * this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding * padding on the left. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param padding_top The padding at the top of the widget. * @param padding_bottom The padding at the bottom of the widget. * @param padding_left The padding at the left of the widget. @@ -169,8 +167,6 @@ public: /** Gets the padding on the different sides of the widget. * See set_padding(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param padding_top Location to store the padding for the top of the widget, or 0. * @param padding_bottom Location to store the padding for the bottom of the widget, or 0. * @param padding_left Location to store the padding for the left of the widget, or 0. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/assistant.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/assistant.h index 9feda5fcec..08dfffa748 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/assistant.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/assistant.h @@ -85,8 +85,6 @@ namespace Gtk * A Gtk::Assistant is a widget used to represent a generally complex * operation split into several steps, guiding the user through its * pages and controlling the page flow to collect the necessary data. - * - * @newin{2,10} * @ingroup Dialogs */ @@ -158,8 +156,6 @@ public: /** Returns the page number of the current page - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The index (starting from 0) of the current page in * the @a assistant, if the @a assistant has no pages, -1 will be returned. @@ -170,8 +166,6 @@ public: * in custom buttons, as the @a assistant flow can be set with * set_forward_page_func(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param page_num Index of the page to switch to, starting from 0. * If negative, the last page will be used. If greater * than the number of pages in the @a assistant, nothing @@ -180,16 +174,12 @@ public: void set_current_page(int page_num); /** Returns the number of pages in the @a assistant - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The number of pages in the @a assistant. */ int get_n_pages() const; /** Returns the child widget contained in page number @a page_num. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page_num The index of a page in the @a assistant, or -1 to get the last page;. * @return The child widget, or 0 @@ -198,8 +188,6 @@ public: Widget* get_nth_page(int page_num); /** Returns the child widget contained in page number @a page_num. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page_num The index of a page in the @a assistant, or -1 to get the last page;. * @return The child widget, or 0 @@ -208,8 +196,6 @@ public: const Widget* get_nth_page(int page_num) const; /** Prepends a page to the @a assistant. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A Gtk::Widget. * @return The index (starting at 0) of the inserted page. @@ -217,8 +203,6 @@ public: int prepend_page(Widget& page); /** Appends a page to the @a assistant. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A Gtk::Widget. * @return The index (starting at 0) of the inserted page. @@ -226,8 +210,6 @@ public: int append_page(Widget& page); /** Inserts a page in the @a assistant at a given position. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A Gtk::Widget. * @param position The index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page, @@ -244,16 +226,12 @@ public: /** Sets the page type for @a page. The page type determines the page * behavior in the @a assistant. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @param type The new type for @a page. */ void set_page_type(const Widget& page, AssistantPageType type); /** Gets the page type of @a page. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @return The page type of @a page. @@ -263,16 +241,12 @@ public: /** Sets a title for @a page. The title is displayed in the header * area of the assistant when @a page is the current page. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @param title The new title for @a page. */ void set_page_title(const Widget& page, const Glib::ustring& title); /** Gets the title for @a page. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @return The title for @a page. @@ -282,16 +256,12 @@ public: /** Sets a header image for @a page. This image is displayed in the header * area of the assistant when @a page is the current page. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @param pixbuf The new header image @a page. */ void set_page_header_image(const Widget& page, const Glib::RefPtr& pixbuf); /** Gets the header image for @a page. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @return The header image for @a page, or 0 @@ -300,8 +270,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_page_header_image(const Widget& page); /** Gets the header image for @a page. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @return The header image for @a page, or 0 @@ -312,16 +280,12 @@ public: /** Sets a header image for @a page. This image is displayed in the side * area of the assistant when @a page is the current page. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @param pixbuf The new header image @a page. */ void set_page_side_image(const Widget& page, const Glib::RefPtr& pixbuf); /** Gets the header image for @a page. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @return The side image for @a page, or 0 @@ -330,8 +294,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_page_side_image(const Widget& page); /** Gets the header image for @a page. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @return The side image for @a page, or 0 @@ -342,16 +304,12 @@ public: /** Sets whether @a page contents are complete. This will make * @a assistant update the buttons state to be able to continue the task. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @param complete The completeness status of the page. */ void set_page_complete(const Widget& page, bool complete = true); /** Gets whether @a page is complete. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param page A page of @a assistant. * @return true if @a page is complete. @@ -359,16 +317,12 @@ public: bool get_page_complete(const Widget& page) const; /** Adds a widget to the action area of a Gtk::Assistant. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param child A Gtk::Widget. */ void add_action_widget(Widget& child); /** Removes a widget from the action area of a Gtk::Assistant. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param child A Gtk::Widget. */ @@ -383,8 +337,6 @@ public: * One situation where it can be necessary to call this * function is when changing a value on the current page * affects the future page flow of the assistant. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void update_buttons_state(); @@ -397,8 +349,6 @@ public: * or undone. For example, showing a progress page to track * a long-running, unreversible operation after the user has * clicked apply on a confirmation page. - * - * @newin{2,22} */ void commit(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/builder.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/builder.h index df9a45c2ea..2219a33e03 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/builder.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/builder.h @@ -104,8 +104,6 @@ namespace Gtk * When one of these objects is created, the XML file is read, and the interface * is created. The Gtk::Builder object then provides an interface for accessing the * widgets in the interface by the names assigned to them inside the UI description. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ class Builder : public Glib::Object @@ -174,8 +172,6 @@ public: * @param filename the name of the file to parse. * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::FileError - * - * @newin{2,12} */ static Glib::RefPtr create_from_file(const std::string& filename); @@ -189,8 +185,6 @@ public: * @param object_id The object to build. * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::FileError - * - * @newin{2,14} */ static Glib::RefPtr create_from_file(const std::string& filename, const Glib::ustring& object_id); //This is just to avoid the ambiguous call when using a string literal, @@ -205,8 +199,6 @@ public: * @param object_id The object to build. * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::FileError - * - * @newin{2,16} */ static Glib::RefPtr create_from_file(const std::string& filename, const char* object_id); /** Parses a file containing a GtkBuilder UI definition, building only the requested objects. @@ -219,8 +211,6 @@ public: * @param object_ids The objects to build. * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::FileError - * - * @newin{2,14} */ static Glib::RefPtr create_from_file(const std::string& filename, const Glib::StringArrayHandle& object_ids); @@ -229,8 +219,6 @@ public: * @param buffer: the string to parse * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,12} */ static Glib::RefPtr create_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer); //This is just to avoid the ambiguous call when using a string literal, @@ -241,8 +229,6 @@ public: * @param object_id The object to build. * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,16} */ static Glib::RefPtr create_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const char* object_id); @@ -252,8 +238,6 @@ public: * @param object_id The object to build. * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,14} */ static Glib::RefPtr create_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const Glib::ustring& object_id); @@ -267,8 +251,6 @@ public: * @param object_ids The objects to build. * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,14} */ static Glib::RefPtr create_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const Glib::StringArrayHandle& object_ids); @@ -279,8 +261,6 @@ public: * @param buffer The file to parse. * @result true on success or false if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,14} */ bool add_from_file(const std::string& filename); @@ -298,8 +278,6 @@ public: * @param The object to build. * @result true on success or false if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,16} */ bool add_from_file(const std::string& filename, const char* object_id); @@ -315,8 +293,6 @@ public: * @param The object to build. * @result true on success or false if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,14} */ bool add_from_file(const std::string& filename, const Glib::ustring& object_id); @@ -335,8 +311,6 @@ public: * Gtk::TreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @a object_ids. * * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param filename The name of the file to parse. * @param object_ids Nul-terminated array of objects to build. * @return A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred. @@ -351,8 +325,6 @@ public: * @param buffer The string to parse. * @result true on success or false if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,12} */ bool add_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer); @@ -364,8 +336,6 @@ public: * @param The object to build. * @result true on success or false if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,16} */ bool add_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const char* object_id); @@ -377,8 +347,6 @@ public: * @param The object to build. * @result true on success or false if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,14} */ bool add_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const Glib::ustring& object_id); @@ -390,8 +358,6 @@ public: * @param The objects to build. * @result true on success or false if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,14} */ bool add_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const Glib::StringArrayHandle& object_ids); @@ -403,8 +369,6 @@ public: * @param length The length of @a buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated). * @result true on success or false if an error occurred. * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError - * - * @newin{2,12} */ bool add_from_string(const char* buffer, gsize length); @@ -413,8 +377,6 @@ public: /** Gets the object named @a name. Note that this function does not * increment the reference count of the returned object. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param name Name of object to get. * @return The object named @a name or 0 if * it could not be found in the object tree. @@ -517,15 +479,11 @@ public: /** Sets the translation domain of @a builder. * See Gtk::Builder::property_translation_domain(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param domain The translation domain or 0. */ void set_translation_domain(const Glib::ustring& domain); /** Gets the translation domain of @a builder. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * @return The translation domain. This string is owned * by the builder object and must not be modified or freed. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/button.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/button.h index ccb6eef48b..a3b153cda3 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/button.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/button.h @@ -241,8 +241,6 @@ public: * you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the * application. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param focus_on_click Whether the button grabs focus when clicked with the mouse. */ void set_focus_on_click(bool focus_on_click = true); @@ -250,8 +248,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse. * See set_focus_on_click(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with * the mouse. */ @@ -261,8 +257,6 @@ public: /** Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless * the child is a Gtk::Misc or a Gtk::Aligment. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param xalign The horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned, * 1.0 is right aligned. * @param yalign The vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned, @@ -271,8 +265,6 @@ public: void set_alignment(float xalign, float yalign); /** Gets the alignment of the child in the button. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param xalign Return location for horizontal alignment. * @param yalign Return location for vertical alignment. @@ -285,8 +277,6 @@ public: * image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call * Gtk::Widget::show() on @a image yourself. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param image A widget to set as the image for the button. */ void set_image(Widget& image); @@ -294,16 +284,12 @@ public: /** Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of @a button. * This may have been explicitly set by set_image() * or specified as a stock item to the constructor. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ Widget* get_image(); /** Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of @a button. * This may have been explicitly set by set_image() * or specified as a stock item to the constructor. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ const Widget* get_image() const; @@ -311,8 +297,6 @@ public: /** Sets the position of the image relative to the text * inside the button. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param position The position. */ void set_image_position(PositionType position); @@ -320,8 +304,6 @@ public: /** Gets the position of the image relative to the text * inside the button. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The position. */ PositionType get_image_position() const; @@ -330,8 +312,6 @@ public: /** Returns the button's event window if it is realized, 0 otherwise. * This function should be rarely needed. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return @a button's event window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_event_window(); @@ -339,8 +319,6 @@ public: /** Returns the button's event window if it is realized, 0 otherwise. * This function should be rarely needed. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return @a button's event window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_event_window() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/buttonbox.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/buttonbox.h index 15479d551b..aba1fa8b78 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/buttonbox.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/buttonbox.h @@ -154,8 +154,6 @@ public: void set_child_secondary(Widget& child, bool is_secondary = true); /** Returns whether @a child should appear in a secondary group of children. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param child A child of @a widget. * @return Whether @a child should appear in a secondary group of children. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/celllayout.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/celllayout.h index 067c2d57f9..fa3c98d7a7 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/celllayout.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/celllayout.h @@ -137,8 +137,6 @@ public: * * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer. * @param expand true if @a cell is to be given extra space allocated to @a cell_layout. */ @@ -150,8 +148,6 @@ public: * * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer. * @param expand true if @a cell is to be given extra space allocated to @a cell_layout. */ @@ -161,24 +157,18 @@ public: /** Return value: a list of cell renderers. * * @return A list of cell renderers. - * - * @newin{2,12}. */ Glib::ListHandle get_cells(); /** Return value: a list of cell renderers. * * @return A list of cell renderers. - * - * @newin{2,12}. */ Glib::ListHandle get_cells() const; /** Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on @a cell_layout and * removes all renderers from @a cell_layout. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void clear(); @@ -191,8 +181,6 @@ public: * of the model contains strings, you could have the "text" attribute of a * Gtk::CellRendererText get its values from column 2. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer. * @param attribute An attribute on the renderer. * @param column The column position on the model to get the attribute from. @@ -212,8 +200,6 @@ public: /** Clears all existing attributes previously set with * set_attributes(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on. */ void clear_attributes(CellRenderer& cell); @@ -222,8 +208,6 @@ public: /** Re-inserts @a cell at @a position. Note that @a cell has already to be packed * into @a cell_layout for this to function properly. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer to reorder. * @param position New position to insert @a cell at. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderer.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderer.h index bbe51b49a8..883512941a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderer.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderer.h @@ -311,8 +311,6 @@ public: /** Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param xalign The x alignment of the cell renderer. * @param yalign The y alignment of the cell renderer. @@ -320,8 +318,6 @@ public: void set_alignment(float align, float yalign); /** Fills in @a xalign and @a yalign with the appropriate values of @a cell. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param xalign Location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or 0. * @param yalign Location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or 0. @@ -330,8 +326,6 @@ public: /** Sets the renderer's padding. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param xpad The x padding of the cell renderer. * @param ypad The y padding of the cell renderer. @@ -339,8 +333,6 @@ public: void set_padding(int xpad, int ypad); /** Fills in @a xpad and @a ypad with the appropriate values of @a cell. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param xpad Location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or 0. * @param ypad Location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or 0. @@ -349,32 +341,24 @@ public: /** Sets the cell renderer's visibility. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param visible The visibility of the cell. */ void set_visible(bool visible = true); /** Returns the cell renderer's visibility. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return true if the cell renderer is visible. */ bool get_visible() const; /** Sets the cell renderer's sensitivity. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param sensitive The sensitivity of the cell. */ void set_sensitive(bool sensitive = true); /** Returns the cell renderer's sensitivity. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return true if the cell renderer is sensitive. */ @@ -389,8 +373,6 @@ public: * This function is for use only by implementations of cell renderers that * need to notify the client program that an editing process was canceled * and the changes were not committed. - * - * @newin{2,4} * Deprecated: 2.6: Use stop_editing() instead * * @deprecated Use stop_editing(). @@ -407,8 +389,6 @@ public: * in response to the Gtk::CellEditable::signal_editing_done() signal of * Gtk::CellEditable. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param canceled true if the editing has been canceled. */ void stop_editing(bool canceled = false); @@ -451,8 +431,6 @@ public: * Note that this signal does not work yet in gtkmm. * See http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=301597 * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param editable the CellEditable. * @param path the path identifying the edited cell. * diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendereraccel.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendereraccel.h index b6d16a14ad..e1b7442a1c 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendereraccel.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendereraccel.h @@ -86,7 +86,6 @@ namespace Gtk * simply typing the new combination. * * @ingroup TreeView - * @newin{2,10} */ class CellRendererAccel : public CellRendererText diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererprogress.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererprogress.h index e0749b67d7..3a86acf7c6 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererprogress.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererprogress.h @@ -43,7 +43,6 @@ namespace Gtk /** Renders numbers as progress bars. * * @ingroup TreeView - * @newin{2,6} */ class CellRendererProgress : public CellRenderer diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererspin.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererspin.h index 2308f93df5..3ab5c846e4 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererspin.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererspin.h @@ -55,7 +55,6 @@ namespace Gtk * signal. * * @ingroup TreeView - * @newin{2,12} */ class CellRendererSpin : public CellRendererText diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderertoggle.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderertoggle.h index 1f131e78da..f908eb161a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderertoggle.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderertoggle.h @@ -144,15 +144,11 @@ public: /** Returns whether the cell renderer is activatable. See * set_activatable(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the cell renderer is activatable. */ bool get_activatable() const; /** Makes the cell renderer activatable. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param setting The value to set. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellview.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellview.h index 647ad87c6e..df936f062b 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellview.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellview.h @@ -139,8 +139,6 @@ public: * set, it will remove it before setting the new model. Use unset_model() to * unset the old model. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param model A Gtk::TreeModel. */ void set_model(const Glib::RefPtr& model); @@ -148,8 +146,6 @@ public: /** Remove the model from the CellView. * * @see set_model(). - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void unset_model(); @@ -157,8 +153,6 @@ public: /** Returns the model for @a cell_view. If no model is used 0 is * returned. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @return A Gtk::TreeModel used or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_model(); @@ -166,8 +160,6 @@ public: /** Returns the model for @a cell_view. If no model is used 0 is * returned. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @return A Gtk::TreeModel used or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_model() const; @@ -180,8 +172,6 @@ public: * a needed intermediate state if say, the model for * the Gtk::CellView becomes temporarily empty. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param path A Gtk::TreePath or 0 to unset. */ void set_displayed_row(const TreeModel::Path& path); @@ -190,8 +180,6 @@ public: * displayed row. If no row is currently displayed, * 0 is returned. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The currently displayed row or 0. */ TreeModel::Path get_displayed_row() const; @@ -199,8 +187,6 @@ public: /** Sets @a requisition to the size needed by @a cell_view to display * the model row pointed to by @a path. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param path A Gtk::TreePath. * @param requisition Return location for the size. * @return true. @@ -209,8 +195,6 @@ public: /** Sets the background color of @a view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param color The new background color. */ @@ -220,8 +204,6 @@ public: #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @a cell_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * Deprecated: 2.18: use Gtk::CellLayout::get_cells() instead. * @@ -236,8 +218,6 @@ public: #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @a cell_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * Deprecated: 2.18: use Gtk::CellLayout::get_cells() instead. * diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/checkmenuitem.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/checkmenuitem.h index a83c3824bd..4063f28e22 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/checkmenuitem.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/checkmenuitem.h @@ -146,16 +146,12 @@ public: /** Sets whether @a check_menu_item is drawn like a Gtk::RadioMenuItem - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param draw_as_radio Whether @a check_menu_item is drawn like a Gtk::RadioMenuItem. */ void set_draw_as_radio(bool draw_as_radio = true); /** Returns whether @a check_menu_item looks like a Gtk::RadioMenuItem - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Whether @a check_menu_item looks like a Gtk::RadioMenuItem. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/clipboard.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/clipboard.h index 1fa8a6d9ce..b324a90777 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/clipboard.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/clipboard.h @@ -169,8 +169,6 @@ public: * if your application called "Foo" has a special-purpose * clipboard, you might call it "_FOO_SPECIAL_CLIPBOARD". * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param display The display for which the clipboard is to be retrieved or created. * @param selection A Gdk::Atom which identifies the clipboard * to use. @@ -185,16 +183,12 @@ public: /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with @a clipboard - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The Gdk::Display associated with @a clipboard. */ Glib::RefPtr get_display(); /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with @a clipboard - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The Gdk::Display associated with @a clipboard. */ @@ -266,8 +260,6 @@ public: * for the image, and for converting the image into the * requested format. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf. */ void set_image(const Glib::RefPtr& pixbuf); @@ -338,8 +330,6 @@ public: * contents of the clipboard could not be converted into URI form. * * @param slot A slot to call when the URIs are received, or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called one way or the other.) - * - * @newin{2,14} */ void request_uris(const SlotUrisReceived& slot); @@ -379,8 +369,6 @@ public: * one way or the other.) Remember that Glib::StringArrayHandle * is an intermediate type, so you should convert it to a * standard C++ container. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void request_targets(const SlotTargetsReceived& slot); @@ -420,8 +408,6 @@ public: * the data to be received using the main loop, so events, * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return A newly-allocated Gdk::Pixbuf object which must * be disposed with Glib::object_unref(), or 0 if * retrieving the selection data failed. (This @@ -456,8 +442,6 @@ public: * wait_for_rich_text() since it doesn't need to retrieve * the actual text. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param buffer A Gtk::TextBuffer. * @return true is there is rich text available, false otherwise. */ @@ -473,8 +457,6 @@ public: * wait_for_image() since it doesn't need to retrieve * the actual image data. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return true is there is an image available, false otherwise. */ bool wait_is_image_available() const; @@ -489,8 +471,6 @@ public: * wait_for_uris() since it doesn't need to retrieve * the actual URI data. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return true is there is an URI list available, false otherwise. */ bool wait_is_uris_available() const; @@ -502,8 +482,6 @@ public: * If you want to see if there's text available on the clipboard, use * wait_is_text_available() instead. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param target A Gdk::Atom indicating which target to look for. * @return true if the target is available, false otherwise. */ @@ -514,8 +492,6 @@ public: * loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait. * * @result targets: The targets. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ Glib::StringArrayHandle wait_for_targets() const; @@ -524,8 +500,6 @@ public: * for the data to be received using the main loop, so events, * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A newly-allocated * 0-terminated array of strings which must * be freed with Glib::strfreev(), or 0 if @@ -558,8 +532,6 @@ public: /** Stores the current clipboard data somewhere so that it will stay * around after the application has quit. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ void store(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorbutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorbutton.h index 954896e782..39d48ac9fe 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorbutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorbutton.h @@ -119,8 +119,6 @@ public: * the current selected color. When the button is clicked, a color-selection dialog will * open, allowing the user to select a color. The swatch will be updated to reflect the * new color when the user finishes. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ ColorButton(); @@ -132,23 +130,17 @@ public: * after the default constructor. * * @param color A Gdk::Color to set the current color with. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ explicit ColorButton(const Gdk::Color& color); /** Sets the current color to be @a color. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param color A Gdk::Color to set the current color with. */ void set_color(const Gdk::Color& color); /** Sets the current opacity to be @a alpha. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param alpha An integer between 0 and 65535. */ @@ -159,47 +151,35 @@ public: * Changes to the return value will have no effect on the Gtk::ColorButton. * * @return A Gdk::Color representing the current internal color of the Gtk::ColorButton. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ Gdk::Color get_color() const; /** Returns the current alpha value. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return An integer between 0 and 65535. */ guint16 get_alpha() const; /** Sets whether or not the color button should use the alpha channel. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param use_alpha true if color button should use alpha channel, false if not. */ void set_use_alpha(bool use_alpha = true); /** Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel? - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return true if the color sample uses alpha channel, false if not. */ bool get_use_alpha() const; /** Sets the title for the color selection dialog. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param title String containing new window title. */ void set_title(const Glib::ustring& title); /** Gets the title of the color selection dialog. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The title. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorselection.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorselection.h index 30a0b4dca3..b8b9306110 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorselection.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorselection.h @@ -347,16 +347,12 @@ public: /** Retrieves the Gtk::ColorSelection widget embedded in the dialog. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The embedded Gtk::ColorSelection. */ ColorSelection* get_color_selection(); /** Retrieves the Gtk::ColorSelection widget embedded in the dialog. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The embedded Gtk::ColorSelection. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/combobox.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/combobox.h index 23c43cb56a..474d68f845 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/combobox.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/combobox.h @@ -142,16 +142,12 @@ public: /** Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox, optionally with an entry. * @param has_entry If this is true then this will have an Entry widget. - * - * newin{2,24} */ explicit ComboBox(bool has_entry); //has_entry has a default value in gtkmm-3.0 but can't here because we already have a default constructor. /** Creates a new ComboBox with the model initialized to @a model. * @param model The model containing data to display in the ComboBox. * @param has_entry If this is true then this will have an Entry widget. - * - * newin{2,24} */ explicit ComboBox(const Glib::RefPtr& model, bool has_entry); //has_entry has a default value in gtkmm-3.0 but can't here because we already have a default constructor. @@ -160,8 +156,6 @@ public: * the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out * in a table. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param width Preferred number of columns. */ void set_wrap_width(int width); @@ -170,8 +164,6 @@ public: * for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box * is in table mode. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The wrap width. */ int get_wrap_width() const; @@ -181,15 +173,11 @@ public: * The row span column contains integers which indicate how many rows * an item should span. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param row_span A column in the model passed during construction. */ void set_row_span_column(int row_span); /** Returns the column with row span information for @a combo_box. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The row span column. */ @@ -200,15 +188,11 @@ public: * @a column_span. The column span column contains integers which indicate * how many columns an item should span. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param column_span A column in the model passed during construction. */ void set_column_span_column(int column_span); /** Returns the column with column span information for @a combo_box. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The column span column. */ @@ -224,8 +208,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff * menu item. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param add_tearoffs true to add tearoff menu items. */ void set_add_tearoffs(bool add_tearoffs = true); @@ -234,16 +216,12 @@ public: /** Gets the current title of the menu in tearoff mode. See * set_add_tearoffs(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The menu's title in tearoff mode. This is an internal copy of the * string which must not be freed. */ Glib::ustring get_title() const; /** Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param title A title for the menu in tearoff mode. */ @@ -253,8 +231,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked * with the mouse. See set_focus_on_click(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return true if the combo box grabs focus when it is * clicked with the mouse. */ @@ -265,8 +241,6 @@ public: * like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from * the main area of the application. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param focus_on_click Whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked * with the mouse. */ @@ -280,8 +254,6 @@ public: * gtk_tree_path_get_indices (path)[0], where * path is the Gtk::TreePath of the active item. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return An integer which is the index of the currently active item, * or -1 if there's no active item. */ @@ -299,8 +271,6 @@ public: /** Sets the active item of @a combo_box to be the item at @a index. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param index An index in the model passed during construction, or -1 to have * no active item. @@ -310,16 +280,12 @@ public: /** Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @a iter, or * unsets the active item if @a iter is 0. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param iter The Gtk::TreeIter, or 0. */ void set_active(const TreeModel::iterator& iter); //TODO: See https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=612396#c30 /** Get the text in the entry, if there is an entry. - * - * @newin{2,24} */ Glib::ustring get_entry_text() const; @@ -329,8 +295,6 @@ public: /** Returns the Gtk::TreeModel which is acting as data source for @a combo_box. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A Gtk::TreeModel which was passed * during construction. @@ -338,8 +302,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_model(); /** Returns the Gtk::TreeModel which is acting as data source for @a combo_box. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A Gtk::TreeModel which was passed * during construction. @@ -353,8 +315,6 @@ public: * call Gtk::CellLayout::clear() yourself if you need to set up different * cell renderers for the new model. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param model A Gtk::TreeModel. */ void set_model(const Glib::RefPtr& model); @@ -362,8 +322,6 @@ public: /** Remove the model from the ComboBox. * * @see set_model(). - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void unset_model(); @@ -385,8 +343,6 @@ public: * always sensitive (Gtk::SENSITIVITY_ON), never sensitive (Gtk::SENSITIVITY_OFF) * or only if there is at least one item to display (Gtk::SENSITIVITY_AUTO). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param sensitivity Specify the sensitivity of the dropdown button. */ void set_button_sensitivity(SensitivityType sensitivity); @@ -394,8 +350,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the combo box sets the dropdown button * sensitive or not when there are no items in the model. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return Gtk::SENSITIVITY_ON if the dropdown button * is sensitive when the model is empty, Gtk::SENSITIVITY_OFF * if the button is always insensitive or @@ -406,8 +360,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the combo box has an entry. - * - * @newin{2,24} * * @return Whether there is an entry in @a combo_box. */ @@ -421,8 +373,6 @@ public: * This is only relevant if @a combo_box has been created with * Gtk::ComboBox::property_has_entry() as true. * - * @newin{2,24} - * * @param text_column A column in @a model to get the strings from for * the internal entry. */ @@ -435,8 +385,6 @@ public: * This is only relevant if @a combo_box has been created with * Gtk::ComboBox::property_has_entry() as true. * - * @newin{2,24} - * * @param text_column A column in @a model to get the strings from for * the internal entry. */ @@ -446,8 +394,6 @@ public: /** Returns the column which @a combo_box is using to get the strings * from to display in the internal entry. * - * @newin{2,24} - * * @return A column in the data source model of @a combo_box. */ int get_entry_text_column() const; @@ -457,8 +403,6 @@ public: * * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies; * applications should have little use for it. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void popup(); @@ -466,8 +410,6 @@ public: * * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies; * applications should have little use for it. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void popdown(); @@ -479,8 +421,6 @@ public: * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies; * applications should have little use for it. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The accessible object corresponding * to the combo box's popup. */ @@ -495,8 +435,6 @@ public: * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies; * applications should have little use for it. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The accessible object corresponding * to the combo box's popup. */ @@ -507,12 +445,10 @@ public: //These are in ComboBoxText. /** @see Bin::get_child(). - * @newin{2,24} */ Entry* get_entry(); /** @see Bin::get_child(). - * @newin{2,24} */ const Entry* get_entry() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/comboboxentry.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/comboboxentry.h index 330afdce91..7c48cd222d 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/comboboxentry.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/comboboxentry.h @@ -155,8 +155,6 @@ public: /** Sets the model column which @a entry_box should use to get strings from * to be @a text_column. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use set_entry_text_column() instead * * @param text_column A column in @a model to get the strings from. @@ -166,8 +164,6 @@ public: /** Sets the model column which @a entry_box should use to get strings from * to be @a text_column. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use set_entry_text_column() instead * * @param text_column A column in @a model to get the strings from. @@ -175,8 +171,6 @@ public: void set_text_column(int text_column) const; /** Returns the column which @a entry_box is using to get the strings from. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use get_entry_text_column() instead * @@ -186,8 +180,6 @@ public: /** Returns the currently active string. * @result The currently active text. - * - * @newin{2,14} */ Glib::ustring get_active_text() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/dialog.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/dialog.h index 859745235a..c0f964f04e 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/dialog.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/dialog.h @@ -241,8 +241,6 @@ public: /** Gets the widget button that uses the given response ID in the action area * of a dialog. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param response_id The response ID used by the @a dialog widget. * @return The @a widget button that uses the given @a response_id, or 0. */ @@ -251,8 +249,6 @@ public: /** Gets the widget button that uses the given response ID in the action area * of a dialog. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param response_id The response ID used by the @a dialog widget. * @return The @a widget button that uses the given @a response_id, or 0. */ @@ -261,8 +257,6 @@ public: /** Gets the response id of a widget in the action area * of a dialog. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param widget A widget in the action area of @a dialog. * @return The response id of @a widget, or Gtk::RESPONSE_NONE * if @a widget doesn't have a response id set. @@ -296,8 +290,6 @@ public: * Gtk::Settings object associated to @a screen, in order to be * notified if the button order setting changes. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen, or 0 to use the default screen. * @return Whether the alternative button order should be used. */ @@ -317,8 +309,6 @@ public: * Use this function after adding all the buttons to your dialog * * @param new_order an array of response ids of the dialog's buttons. - * - * @newinp26 */ void set_alternative_button_order_from_array(const Glib::ArrayHandle& new_order); @@ -369,16 +359,12 @@ public: // Changed post-2.18.2 /** Returns the action area of @a dialog. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The action area. */ ButtonBox* get_action_area(); /** Returns the action area of @a dialog. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The action area. */ @@ -388,16 +374,12 @@ public: //We kept it as get_vbox() when reimplementing a MEMBER_GET with this new C function: /** Returns the content area of @a dialog. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The content area Gtk::VBox. */ VBox* get_vbox(); /** Returns the content area of @a dialog. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The content area Gtk::VBox. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entry.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entry.h index b8192ceec0..ff83cde16f 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entry.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entry.h @@ -170,8 +170,6 @@ public: /** Get the Gtk::EntryBuffer object which holds the text for * this widget. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return A Gtk::EntryBuffer object. */ Glib::RefPtr get_buffer(); @@ -179,8 +177,6 @@ public: /** Get the Gtk::EntryBuffer object which holds the text for * this widget. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return A Gtk::EntryBuffer object. */ Glib::RefPtr get_buffer() const; @@ -189,8 +185,6 @@ public: /** Set the Gtk::EntryBuffer object which holds the text for * this widget. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param buffer A Gtk::EntryBuffer. */ void set_buffer(const Glib::RefPtr& buffer); @@ -203,8 +197,6 @@ public: * * See also get_icon_window(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The entry's text window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_text_window(); @@ -216,8 +208,6 @@ public: * * See also get_icon_window(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The entry's text window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_text_window() const; @@ -258,8 +248,6 @@ public: /** Unsets the invisible char previously set with * set_invisible_char(). So that the * default invisible char is used again. - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void unset_invisible_char(); @@ -293,8 +281,6 @@ public: * in-place editing of some text in a canvas or list widget, where * pixel-exact positioning of the entry is important. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param border A Gtk::Border, or 0. */ void set_inner_border(const Border& border); @@ -302,24 +288,18 @@ public: /** This function returns the entry's Gtk::Entry::property_inner_border() property. See * set_inner_border() for more information. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The entry's Gtk::Border, or 0 if none was set. */ Border get_inner_border() const; /** Sets whether the text is overwritten when typing in the Gtk::Entry. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @param overwrite New value. */ void set_overwrite_mode(bool overwrite = true); /** Gets the value set by set_overwrite_mode(). - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return Whether the text is overwritten when typing. */ @@ -358,8 +338,6 @@ public: * * [C example ellipted] * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The current number of characters * in Gtk::Entry, or 0 if there are none. */ @@ -500,8 +478,6 @@ public: * The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system * as the entry. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param adjustment An adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor * is moved, or 0. */ @@ -510,8 +486,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment for the entry. * See set_cursor_hadjustment(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The horizontal cursor adjustment, or 0 * if none has been set. */ @@ -520,8 +494,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment for the entry. * See set_cursor_hadjustment(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The horizontal cursor adjustment, or 0 * if none has been set. */ @@ -532,8 +504,6 @@ public: * the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed * text is shorter than the width of the entry. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param xalign The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right). * Reversed for RTL layouts. */ @@ -543,16 +513,12 @@ public: * the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed * text is shorter than the width of the entry. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param xalign The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right). * Reversed for RTL layouts. */ void set_alignment(AlignmentEnum xalign); /** Gets the value set by set_alignment(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The alignment. */ @@ -564,15 +530,11 @@ public: * @a completion using the Gtk::EntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if * @a completion is set to 0. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param completion The Gtk::EntryCompletion or 0. */ void set_completion(const Glib::RefPtr& completion); /** Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @a entry. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The auxiliary completion object currently * in use by @a entry. @@ -580,8 +542,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_completion(); /** Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @a entry. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The auxiliary completion object currently * in use by @a entry. @@ -593,8 +553,6 @@ public: * fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0, * inclusive. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param fraction Fraction of the task that's been completed. */ void set_progress_fraction(double fraction); @@ -602,8 +560,6 @@ public: /** Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed. * See set_progress_fraction(). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @return A fraction from 0.0 to 1.0. */ double get_progress_fraction() const; @@ -611,15 +567,11 @@ public: /** Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress * bouncing block for each call to progress_pulse(). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param fraction Fraction between 0.0 and 1.0. */ void set_progress_pulse_step(double fraction); /** Retrieves the pulse step set with set_progress_pulse_step(). - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return A fraction from 0.0 to 1.0. */ @@ -631,8 +583,6 @@ public: * progress_pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit * (the amount of movement per pulse is determined by * set_progress_pulse_step()). - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void progress_pulse(); @@ -641,8 +591,6 @@ public: * * If @a pixbuf is 0, no icon will be shown in the specified position. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf, or 0. */ @@ -655,8 +603,6 @@ public: * * If @a stock_id is 0, no icon will be shown in the specified position. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @param stock_id The name of the stock item, or 0. */ @@ -672,8 +618,6 @@ public: * * If @a icon_name is 0, no icon will be shown in the specified position. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos The position at which to set the icon. * @param icon_name An icon name, or 0. */ @@ -688,8 +632,6 @@ public: * * If @a icon is 0, no icon will be shown in the specified position. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos The position at which to set the icon. * @param icon The icon to set, or 0. */ @@ -701,8 +643,6 @@ public: * to store image data. If the icon has no image data, * the return value will be Gtk::IMAGE_EMPTY. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return Image representation being used. */ @@ -714,8 +654,6 @@ public: * method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a * Gdk::Pixbuf, a Icon, a stock item, or an icon name. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf, or 0 if no icon is * set for this position. @@ -728,8 +666,6 @@ public: * method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a * Gdk::Pixbuf, a Icon, a stock item, or an icon name. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf, or 0 if no icon is * set for this position. @@ -740,8 +676,6 @@ public: * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by * pixbuf, icon name or gicon). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return A stock id, or 0 if no icon is set or if the icon * wasn't set from a stock id. @@ -752,8 +686,6 @@ public: * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by * pixbuf, stock or gicon). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return An icon name, or 0 if no icon is set or if the icon * wasn't set from an icon name. @@ -764,8 +696,6 @@ public: * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by * stock, pixbuf, or icon name). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return A Icon, or 0 if no icon is set * or if the icon is not a Icon. @@ -776,8 +706,6 @@ public: * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by * stock, pixbuf, or icon name). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return A Icon, or 0 if no icon is set * or if the icon is not a Icon. @@ -786,8 +714,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the icon is activatable. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @param activatable true if the icon should be activatable. @@ -797,8 +723,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the icon is activatable. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return true if the icon is activatable. @@ -806,8 +730,6 @@ public: bool get_icon_activatable(EntryIconPosition icon_pos = ENTRY_ICON_PRIMARY) const; /** Sets the sensitivity for the specified icon. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @param sensitive Specifies whether the icon should appear @@ -816,8 +738,6 @@ public: void set_icon_sensitive(EntryIconPosition icon_pos = ENTRY_ICON_PRIMARY, bool sensitive = true); /** Returns whether the icon appears sensitive or insensitive. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return true if the icon is sensitive. @@ -829,8 +749,6 @@ public: * This function is intended for use in a Gtk::Widget::signal_query_tooltip() * signal handler. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param x The x coordinate of the position to find. * @param y The y coordinate of the position to find. * @return The index of the icon at the given position, or -1. @@ -846,8 +764,6 @@ public: * See also Gtk::Widget::set_tooltip_text() and * set_icon_tooltip_markup(). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos The icon position. * @param tooltip The contents of the tooltip for the icon, or 0. */ @@ -858,8 +774,6 @@ public: /** Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified * position in @a entry. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos The icon position. * @return The tooltip text, or 0. Free the returned string * with Glib::free() when done. @@ -876,8 +790,6 @@ public: * See also Gtk::Widget::set_tooltip_markup() and * gtk_enty_set_icon_tooltip_text(). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos The icon position. * @param tooltip The contents of the tooltip for the icon, or 0. */ @@ -888,8 +800,6 @@ public: /** Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified * position in @a entry. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos The icon position. * @return The tooltip text, or 0. Free the returned string * with Glib::free() when done. @@ -911,8 +821,6 @@ public: * have to use Glib::signal_connect_after() to ensure that your signal handler * gets executed after the default handler. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @param target_list The targets (data formats) in which the data can be provided. * @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions. @@ -927,8 +835,6 @@ public: * This function is meant to be used in a Gtk::Widget::signal_drag_data_get() * callback. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @return Index of the icon which is the source of the current * DND operation, or -1. */ @@ -942,8 +848,6 @@ public: * * See also get_text_window(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return The entry's icon window at @a icon_pos. */ @@ -956,8 +860,6 @@ public: * * See also get_text_window(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param icon_pos Icon position. * @return The entry's icon window at @a icon_pos. */ @@ -975,8 +877,6 @@ public: * and the default key event handling of the Gtk::Entry. * See Gtk::TextView::reset_im_context() for an example of use. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param event The key event. * @return true if the input method handled the key event. */ @@ -986,8 +886,6 @@ public: * * This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer * would confuse on-going input method behavior. - * - * @newin{2,22} */ void reset_im_context(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrybuffer.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrybuffer.h index 7a9d6ef6be..8b94ef83a6 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrybuffer.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrybuffer.h @@ -63,8 +63,6 @@ namespace Gtk * text to be stored in an alternate location, such as non-pageable memory, * useful in the case of important passwords. Or a derived class could * integrate with an application's concept of undo/redo. - * - * @@newin{2,20} */ class EntryBuffer : public Glib::Object @@ -146,15 +144,11 @@ public: /** Retrieves the length in bytes of the buffer. * See get_length(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return The byte length of the buffer. */ gsize get_bytes() const; /** Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return The number of characters in the buffer. */ @@ -165,8 +159,6 @@ public: * The memory pointer returned by this call will not change * unless this object emits a signal, or is finalized. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return A pointer to the contents of the widget as a * string. This string points to internally allocated * storage in the buffer and must not be freed, modified or @@ -186,8 +178,6 @@ public: * the current contents are longer than the given length, then they * will be truncated to fit. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param max_length The maximum length of the entry buffer, or 0 for no maximum. * (other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will * be clamped to the range 0-65536. @@ -197,8 +187,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in * @a buffer. See set_max_length(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return The maximum allowed number of characters * in Gtk::EntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum. */ @@ -222,8 +210,6 @@ public: * * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param position Position at which to delete text. * @param n_chars Number of characters to delete. * @return The number of characters deleted. @@ -238,8 +224,6 @@ public: /** Used when subclassing Gtk::EntryBuffer - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param position Position at which text was deleted. * @param n_chars Number of characters deleted. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrycompletion.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrycompletion.h index 7df7765713..95910a71af 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrycompletion.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrycompletion.h @@ -137,16 +137,12 @@ public: //Careful, this actually returns a GtkWidget*, so it might not always be a GtkEntry in future GTK+ versions. /** Gets the entry @a completion has been attached to. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The entry @a completion has been attached to. */ Entry* get_entry(); /** Gets the entry @a completion has been attached to. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The entry @a completion has been attached to. */ @@ -157,8 +153,6 @@ public: * a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model. * Use unset_model() to unset the old model. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param model The Gtk::TreeModel. */ void set_model(const Glib::RefPtr& model); @@ -166,8 +160,6 @@ public: /** Returns the model the Gtk::EntryCompletion is using as data source. * Returns 0 if the model is unset. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A Gtk::TreeModel, or 0 if none * is currently being used. */ @@ -176,8 +168,6 @@ public: /** Returns the model the Gtk::EntryCompletion is using as data source. * Returns 0 if the model is unset. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A Gtk::TreeModel, or 0 if none * is currently being used. */ @@ -186,8 +176,6 @@ public: /** Remove the model from the EntryCompletion. * * @see set_model(). - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void unset_model(); @@ -202,15 +190,11 @@ public: * key takes a lot of time and will come up with meaningless results anyway * (ie, a too large dataset). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param length The minimum length of the key in order to start completing. */ void set_minimum_key_length(int length); /** Returns the minimum key length as set for @a completion. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The currently used minimum key length. */ @@ -219,15 +203,11 @@ public: /** Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the * current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list * view will be updated accordingly. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void complete(); /** Requests a prefix insertion. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ void insert_prefix(); @@ -246,8 +226,6 @@ public: //TODO: Change default - it would be nicer to delete the last action instead of the first. /** Deletes the action at @a index from @a completion's action list. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param index The index of the item to Delete. */ @@ -257,8 +235,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the common prefix of the possible completions should * be automatically inserted in the entry. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param inline_completion true to do inline completion. */ void set_inline_completion(bool inline_completion = true); @@ -266,8 +242,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should * be automatically inserted in the entry. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return true if inline completion is turned on. */ bool get_inline_completion() const; @@ -275,31 +249,23 @@ public: /** Sets whether it is possible to cycle through the possible completions * inside the entry. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param inline_selection true to do inline selection. */ void set_inline_selection(bool inline_selection = true); /** Returns true if inline-selection mode is turned on. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * @return true if inline-selection mode is on. */ bool get_inline_selection() const; /** Sets whether the completions should be presented in a popup window. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param popup_completion true to do popup completion. */ void set_popup_completion(bool popup_completion = true); /** Returns whether the completions should be presented in a popup window. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return true if popup completion is turned on. */ @@ -309,8 +275,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the completion popup window will be resized to be the same * width as the entry. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param popup_set_width true to make the width of the popup the same as the entry. */ void set_popup_set_width(bool popup_set_width = true); @@ -318,8 +282,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the completion popup window will be resized to the * width of the entry. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return true if the popup window will be resized to the width of * the entry. */ @@ -333,8 +295,6 @@ public: * are using inline * completion. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @deprecated Use set_popup_single_match() instead. This function was wrongly named. * * @param popup_single_match true if the popup should appear even for a single @@ -349,8 +309,6 @@ public: * are using inline * completion. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param popup_single_match true if the popup should appear even for a single * match. */ @@ -360,8 +318,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is * only a single match. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return true if the popup window will appear regardless of the * number of matches. */ @@ -371,8 +327,6 @@ public: * the completion or an empty string if there's no completion ongoing. * * @return The prefix for the current completion - * - * @newin{2,12}. */ Glib::ustring get_completion_prefix() const; @@ -386,8 +340,6 @@ public: * column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell * renderer, use Glib::object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param column The column in the model of @a completion to get strings from. */ void set_text_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& column); @@ -401,8 +353,6 @@ public: * column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell * renderer, use Glib::object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param column The column in the model of @a completion to get strings from. */ void set_text_column(int column); @@ -410,8 +360,6 @@ public: #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Returns the column in the model of @a completion to get strings from. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @deprecated Use the const version of this method. * @@ -422,8 +370,6 @@ public: /** Returns the column in the model of @a completion to get strings from. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The column containing the strings. */ @@ -480,8 +426,6 @@ public: * * @par Prototype: * bool %on_cursor_on_match(const TreeModel::iterator& iter) - * - * @newin{2,12} */ Glib::SignalProxy1< bool, const TreeModel::iterator& > signal_cursor_on_match(); @@ -499,8 +443,6 @@ public: * the FileChooser inserts only the part of the prefix up to the * next '/'. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param prefix The common prefix of all possible completions. * @result true if the signal has been handled * diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/enums.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/enums.h index 206f0b489e..072f3767fa 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/enums.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/enums.h @@ -1694,8 +1694,6 @@ public: * @param height Location to store icon height. * @param settings A Gtk::Settings object, used to determine which set of user preferences to used. * @result true if size was a valid size. - * - * @newin{2,14} */ static bool lookup(IconSize size, int& width, int& height, const Glib::RefPtr& settings); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/eventbox.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/eventbox.h index 658740c0b5..53d7133315 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/eventbox.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/eventbox.h @@ -116,8 +116,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the event box has a visible window. * See set_visible_window() for details. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the event box window is visible. */ bool get_visible_window() const; @@ -158,8 +156,6 @@ public: * descendant windows, not just at the same place on the screen. * * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param visible_window Boolean value. */ void set_visible_window(bool visible_window = true); @@ -168,8 +164,6 @@ public: * windows of its child. See set_above_child() for * details. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the event box window is above the window * of its child. */ @@ -183,8 +177,6 @@ public: * * The default is to keep the window below the child. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param above_child true if the event box window is above the windows of its child. */ void set_above_child(bool above_child = true); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/expander.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/expander.h index 8c75fe375d..fda9375a59 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/expander.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/expander.h @@ -128,8 +128,6 @@ public: /** Creates a new Expander. * * The Expander has an empty label. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ Expander(); @@ -143,8 +141,6 @@ public: * * @param label The string for the label describing the Expander. * @param mnemonic Wether the label may contain underscores to set up accelerators. - - * @newin{2,4} */ explicit Expander(const Glib::ustring& label, bool mnemonic = false); //gtkmmproc error: gkt_expander_new_with_mnemonic : ignored method defs lookup failed @@ -154,8 +150,6 @@ public: * the child widget to be revealed, and false if you want the * child widget to be hidden. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param expanded Whether the child widget is revealed. */ void set_expanded(bool expanded = true); @@ -165,8 +159,6 @@ public: * * See set_expanded(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The current state of the expander. */ bool get_expanded() const; @@ -175,15 +167,11 @@ public: /** Sets the spacing field of @a expander, which is the number of pixels to * place between expander and the child. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param spacing Distance between the expander and child in pixels. */ void set_spacing(int spacing); /** Gets the value set by set_spacing(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Spacing between the expander and child. */ @@ -194,8 +182,6 @@ public: * * This will also clear any previously set labels. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param label A string. */ void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label); @@ -212,8 +198,6 @@ public: * be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label * widget. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The text of the label widget. This string is owned * by the widget and must not be modified or freed. */ @@ -223,8 +207,6 @@ public: /** If true, an underline in the text of the expander label indicates * the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param use_underline true if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics. */ void set_use_underline(bool use_underline = true); @@ -232,8 +214,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether an embedded underline in the expander label indicates a * mnemonic. See set_use_underline(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if an embedded underline in the expander label * indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys. */ @@ -243,8 +223,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in Pango's text markup * language. See Gtk::Label::set_markup(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param use_markup true if the label's text should be parsed for markup. */ void set_use_markup(bool use_markup = true); @@ -253,8 +231,6 @@ public: * the Pango text markup * language. See set_use_markup(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the label's text will be parsed for markup. */ bool get_use_markup() const; @@ -263,8 +239,6 @@ public: /** Set the label widget for the expander. This is the widget * that will appear embedded alongside the expander arrow. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param label_widget The new label widget. */ void set_label_widget(Widget& label_widget); @@ -272,8 +246,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See * set_label_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The label widget, * or 0 if there is none. */ @@ -282,8 +254,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See * set_label_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The label widget, * or 0 if there is none. */ @@ -293,8 +263,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the label widget should fill all available horizontal space * allocated to @a expander. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param label_fill true if the label should should fill all available horizontal * space. */ @@ -303,8 +271,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the label widget will fill all available horizontal * space allocated to @a expander. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return true if the label widget will fill all available horizontal * space. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooser.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooser.h index 5642a2de9f..6a245fe7e7 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooser.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooser.h @@ -276,8 +276,6 @@ public: * Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is * Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param action The action that the file selector is performing. */ void set_action(FileChooserAction action); @@ -285,8 +283,6 @@ public: /** Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see * set_action(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The action that the file selector is performing. */ FileChooserAction get_action() const; @@ -301,8 +297,6 @@ public: * rather than the URI functions like * get_uri(), * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param local_only true if only local files can be selected. */ void set_local_only(bool local_only = true); @@ -310,8 +304,6 @@ public: /** Gets whether only local files can be selected in the * file selector. See set_local_only() * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if only local files can be selected. */ bool get_local_only() const; @@ -320,8 +312,6 @@ public: * only relevant if the action is set to be Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN or * Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param select_multiple true if multiple files can be selected. */ void set_select_multiple(bool select_multiple = true); @@ -329,16 +319,12 @@ public: /** Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file * selector. See set_select_multiple(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if multiple files can be selected. */ bool get_select_multiple() const; /** Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param show_hidden true if hidden files and folders should be displayed. */ @@ -347,8 +333,6 @@ public: /** Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector. * See set_show_hidden(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return true if hidden files and folders are displayed. */ bool get_show_hidden() const; @@ -366,8 +350,6 @@ public: * Gtk::FileChooser::signal_confirm_overwrite() signal; please refer to its documentation * for the details. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param do_overwrite_confirmation Whether to confirm overwriting in save mode. */ void set_do_overwrite_confirmation(bool do_overwrite_confirmation = true); @@ -375,8 +357,6 @@ public: /** Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user * types a file name that already exists. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return true if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog; * false otherwise. */ @@ -387,8 +367,6 @@ public: * This is only relevant if the action is not set to be * Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param create_folders true if the New Folder button should be displayed. */ void set_create_folders(bool create_folders = true); @@ -396,8 +374,6 @@ public: /** Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders. * See set_create_folders(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the New Folder button should be displayed. */ bool get_create_folders() const; @@ -413,8 +389,6 @@ public: * Please see the documentation for those functions for an example of using * set_current_name() as well. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param name The filename to use, as a UTF-8 string. */ void set_current_name(const Glib::ustring& name); @@ -426,8 +400,6 @@ public: * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected * folder. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The currently selected filename, or an empty string * if no file is selected, or the selected file can't * be represented with a local filename. @@ -457,8 +429,6 @@ public: * * [C example ellipted] * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param filename The filename to set as current. * @return true if both the folder could be changed and the file was * selected successfully, false otherwise. @@ -469,8 +439,6 @@ public: * folder of @a chooser, then the current folder of @a chooser will * be changed to the folder containing @a filename. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param filename The filename to select. * @return true if both the folder could be changed and the file was * selected successfully, false otherwise. @@ -481,21 +449,15 @@ public: * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param filename The filename to unselect. */ void unselect_filename(const Glib::ustring& filename); /** Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void select_all(); /** Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void unselect_all(); @@ -506,8 +468,6 @@ public: * * @return A list containing the filenames of all selected * files and subfolders in the current folder. - * - * @newin{2,4}. */ Glib::SListHandle get_filenames() const; @@ -515,8 +475,6 @@ public: * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder, * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param filename The full path of the new current folder. * @return true if the folder could be changed successfully, false * otherwise. @@ -531,8 +489,6 @@ public: * and empty string if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was * requested from it; for example, as would be for calling * set_current_folder() on a nonexistent folder. - * - * @newin{2,4}. */ Glib::ustring get_current_folder() const; @@ -547,8 +503,6 @@ public: * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected * folder. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The currently selected URI, or an empty string * if no file is selected. */ @@ -576,8 +530,6 @@ public: * * [C example ellipted] * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param uri The URI to set as current. * @return true if both the folder could be changed and the URI was * selected successfully, false otherwise. @@ -588,8 +540,6 @@ public: * file in the current folder of @a chooser, then the current folder of * @a chooser will be changed to the folder containing @a filename. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param uri The URI to select. * @return true if both the folder could be changed and the URI was * selected successfully, false otherwise. @@ -600,8 +550,6 @@ public: * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param uri The URI to unselect. */ void unselect_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri); @@ -611,8 +559,6 @@ public: * * @return A list containing the URIs of all selected * files and subfolders in the current folder. - * - * @newin{2,4}. */ Glib::SListHandle get_uris() const; @@ -621,8 +567,6 @@ public: * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder, * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param uri The URI for the new current folder. * @return true if the folder could be changed successfully, false * otherwise. @@ -640,8 +584,6 @@ public: * currently-selected folder in that mode, use get_uri() as the * usual way to get the selection. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The URI for the current folder. */ Glib::ustring get_current_folder_uri() const; @@ -670,8 +612,6 @@ public: * * [C example ellipted] * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param file The File to set as current. * @return true if both the folder could be changed and the file was * selected successfully, false otherwise. @@ -682,8 +622,6 @@ public: /** Selects the file referred to by @a file. An internal function. See * _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param file The file to select. * @return true if both the folder could be changed and the path was * selected successfully, false otherwise. @@ -693,8 +631,6 @@ public: /** Unselects the file referred to by @a file. If the file is not in the current * directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param file A File. */ void unselect_file(const Glib::RefPtr& file); @@ -703,8 +639,6 @@ public: /** Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of @a chooser * as File. An internal function, see get_uris(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A SList * containing a File for each selected file and subfolder in the * current folder. Free the returned list with Glib::slist_free(), and @@ -716,8 +650,6 @@ public: /** Sets the current folder for @a chooser from a File. * Internal function, see set_current_folder_uri(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param file The File for the new folder. * @return true if the folder could be changed successfully, false * otherwise. @@ -729,8 +661,6 @@ public: /** Gets the current folder of @a chooser as File. * See get_current_folder_uri(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The File for the current folder. */ Glib::RefPtr get_current_folder_file(); @@ -744,8 +674,6 @@ public: * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected * folder. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A selected File. You own the returned file; * use Glib::object_unref() to release it. */ @@ -758,8 +686,6 @@ public: * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected * folder. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A selected File. You own the returned file; * use Glib::object_unref() to release it. */ @@ -782,8 +708,6 @@ public: * may display an internally generated preview of the current file or * it may display no preview at all. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param preview_widget Widget for displaying preview. */ void set_preview_widget(Gtk::Widget& preview_widget); @@ -792,8 +716,6 @@ public: /** Gets the current preview widget; see * set_preview_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The current preview widget, or 0. */ Gtk::Widget* get_preview_widget(); @@ -801,8 +723,6 @@ public: /** Gets the current preview widget; see * set_preview_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The current preview widget, or 0. */ const Gtk::Widget* get_preview_widget() const; @@ -815,8 +735,6 @@ public: * or it may display no preview at all. See * set_preview_widget() for more details. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param active Whether to display the user-specified preview widget. */ void set_preview_widget_active(bool active = true); @@ -825,8 +743,6 @@ public: * should be shown for the current filename. See * set_preview_widget_active(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the preview widget is active for the current filename. */ bool get_preview_widget_active() const; @@ -839,8 +755,6 @@ public: * * See also: set_preview_widget() * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param use_label Whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file. */ void set_use_preview_label(bool use_label = true); @@ -857,8 +771,6 @@ public: /** Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview * widget. See set_preview_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The filename to preview, or an empty string if no file * is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented * as a local filename. @@ -868,8 +780,6 @@ public: /** Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview * widget. See set_preview_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The URI for the file to preview, or an empty string if no file is * selected. */ @@ -880,8 +790,6 @@ public: /** Gets the File that should be previewed in a custom preview * Internal function, see get_preview_uri(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The File for the file to preview, * or 0 if no file is selected. Free with Glib::object_unref(). */ @@ -890,8 +798,6 @@ public: /** Gets the File that should be previewed in a custom preview * Internal function, see get_preview_uri(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The File for the file to preview, * or 0 if no file is selected. Free with Glib::object_unref(). */ @@ -901,8 +807,6 @@ public: */ /** Sets an application-supplied widget to provide extra options to the user. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param extra_widget Widget for extra options. */ @@ -911,8 +815,6 @@ public: /** Gets the current preview widget; see * set_extra_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The current extra widget, or 0. */ Gtk::Widget* get_extra_widget(); @@ -920,8 +822,6 @@ public: /** Gets the current preview widget; see * set_extra_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The current extra widget, or 0. */ const Gtk::Widget* get_extra_widget() const; @@ -936,15 +836,11 @@ public: * Note that the @a chooser takes ownership of the filter, so you have to * ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param filter A Gtk::FileFilter. */ void add_filter(const FileFilter& filter); /** Removes @a filter from the list of filters that the user can select between. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param filter A Gtk::FileFilter. */ @@ -956,8 +852,6 @@ public: * * @return A list containing the current set of * user selectable filters. - * - * @newin{2,4}. */ Glib::SListHandle< FileFilter* > list_filters(); @@ -966,8 +860,6 @@ public: * * @return A list containing the current set of * user selectable filters. - * - * @newin{2,4}. */ Glib::SListHandle< const FileFilter* > list_filters() const; @@ -981,23 +873,17 @@ public: * filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed * set of files without letting the user change it. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param filter A Gtk::FileFilter. */ void set_filter(const FileFilter& filter); /** Gets the current filter; see set_filter(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The current filter, or 0. */ FileFilter* get_filter(); /** Gets the current filter; see set_filter(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The current filter, or 0. */ @@ -1011,8 +897,6 @@ public: * application. For example, you can use this to add a * "/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param folder Filename of the folder to add. * @return true if the folder could be added successfully, false * otherwise. In the latter case, the @a error will be set as appropriate. @@ -1020,8 +904,6 @@ public: bool add_shortcut_folder(const Glib::ustring& folder); /** Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param folder Filename of the folder to remove. * @return true if the operation succeeds, false otherwise. @@ -1034,8 +916,6 @@ public: /** Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by * add_shortcut_folder(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A list of folder filenames, if there are any shortcut * folders.. */ @@ -1047,8 +927,6 @@ public: * by the application. For example, you can use this to add a * "file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param uri URI of the folder to add. * @return true if the folder could be added successfully, false * otherwise. In the latter case, the @a error will be set as appropriate. @@ -1056,8 +934,6 @@ public: bool add_shortcut_folder_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri); /** Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param uri URI of the folder to remove. * @return true if the operation succeeds, false otherwise. @@ -1071,8 +947,6 @@ public: * add_shortcut_folder_uri(). * * @return A list of folder URIs - * - * @newin{2,4}. */ Glib::SListHandle list_shortcut_folder_uris() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserbutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserbutton.h index 48a0013104..10fa795800 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserbutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserbutton.h @@ -154,15 +154,11 @@ public: /** Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @a button. The returned value * should not be modified or freed. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return A pointer to the browse dialog's title. */ Glib::ustring get_title() const; /** Modifies the @a title of the browse dialog used by @a button. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param title The new browse dialog title. */ @@ -170,16 +166,12 @@ public: /** Retrieves the width in characters of the @a button widget's entry and/or label. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return An integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself. */ int get_width_chars() const; /** Sets the width (in characters) that @a button will use to @a n_chars. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param n_chars The new width, in characters. */ @@ -189,8 +181,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse. * See set_focus_on_click(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with * the mouse. */ @@ -201,8 +191,6 @@ public: * you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the * application. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param focus_on_click Whether the button grabs focus when clicked with the mouse. */ void set_focus_on_click(gboolean focus_on_click = true); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserwidget.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserwidget.h index 0ed9d04361..c2b8e798e8 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserwidget.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserwidget.h @@ -119,8 +119,6 @@ public: * custom windows, and it is the same widget that is used by Gtk::FileChooserDialog. * * @param action Open or save mode for the widget - * - * @newin{2,4} */ explicit FileChooserWidget(FileChooserAction action); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filefilter.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filefilter.h index f2b3e27cc1..94e76a16ea 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filefilter.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filefilter.h @@ -196,16 +196,12 @@ public: * that will be displayed in the file selector user interface if * there is a selectable list of filters. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param name The human-readable-name for the filter, or 0 * to remove any existing name. */ void set_name(const Glib::ustring& name); /** Gets the human-readable name for the filter. See set_name(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The human-readable name of the filter, * or 0. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not @@ -215,16 +211,12 @@ public: /** Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to @a filter. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param mime_type Name of a MIME type. */ void add_mime_type(const Glib::ustring& mime_type); /** Adds a rule allowing a shell style glob to a filter. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param pattern A shell style glob. */ @@ -232,8 +224,6 @@ public: /** Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported * by GdkPixbuf. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ void add_pixbuf_formats(); @@ -260,8 +250,6 @@ public: * is intended principally for use in the implementation of * Gtk::FileChooser. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return Bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when * calling filter(). */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontbutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontbutton.h index fdbb7256dc..701a6b2476 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontbutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontbutton.h @@ -116,48 +116,36 @@ public: /** Retrieves the title of the font selection dialog. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return An internal copy of the title string which must not be freed. */ Glib::ustring get_title() const; /** Sets the title for the font selection dialog. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param title A string containing the font selection dialog title. */ void set_title(const Glib::ustring& title); /** Returns whether the selected font is used in the label. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Whether the selected font is used in the label. */ bool get_use_font() const; /** If @a use_font is true, the font name will be written using the selected font. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param use_font If true, font name will be written using font chosen. */ void set_use_font(bool use_font = true); /** Returns whether the selected size is used in the label. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Whether the selected size is used in the label. */ bool get_use_size() const; /** If @a use_size is true, the font name will be written using the selected size. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param use_size If true, font name will be written using the selected size. */ @@ -170,15 +158,11 @@ public: * style, size, weight) just query these properties from the * Pango::FontDescription object. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return An internal copy of the font name which must not be freed. */ Glib::ustring get_font_name() const; /** Sets or updates the currently-displayed font in font picker dialog. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param fontname Name of font to display in font selection dialog. * @return Return value of Gtk::FontSelectionDialog::set_font_name() if the @@ -187,32 +171,24 @@ public: bool set_font_name(const Glib::ustring& fontname); /** Returns whether the name of the font style will be shown in the label. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Whether the font style will be shown in the label. */ bool get_show_style() const; /** If @a show_style is true, the font style will be displayed along with name of the selected font. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param show_style true if font style should be displayed in label. */ void set_show_style(bool show_style = true); /** Returns whether the font size will be shown in the label. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Whether the font size will be shown in the label. */ bool get_show_size() const; /** If @a show_size is true, the font size will be displayed along with the name of the selected font. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param show_size true if font size should be displayed in dialog. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontselection.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontselection.h index ffa88cd5a3..b471fce2b4 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontselection.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontselection.h @@ -127,8 +127,6 @@ public: /** This returns the Gtk::TreeView that lists font families, for * example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ TreeView* get_family_list(); @@ -136,8 +134,6 @@ public: /** This returns the Gtk::TreeView that lists font families, for * example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ const TreeView* get_family_list() const; @@ -146,8 +142,6 @@ public: /** This returns the Gtk::TreeView which lists all styles available for * the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ TreeView* get_face_list(); @@ -155,8 +149,6 @@ public: /** This returns the Gtk::TreeView which lists all styles available for * the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ const TreeView* get_face_list() const; @@ -165,8 +157,6 @@ public: /** This returns the Gtk::Entry used to allow the user to edit the font * number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ Entry* get_size_entry(); @@ -174,24 +164,18 @@ public: /** This returns the Gtk::Entry used to allow the user to edit the font * number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ const Entry* get_size_entry() const; /** This returns the Gtk::TreeeView used to list font sizes. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ TreeView* get_size_list(); /** This returns the Gtk::TreeeView used to list font sizes. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ @@ -199,16 +183,12 @@ public: /** This returns the Gtk::Entry used to display the font as a preview. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ Entry* get_preview_entry(); /** This returns the Gtk::Entry used to display the font as a preview. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel. */ @@ -216,8 +196,6 @@ public: /** Gets the Pango::FontFamily representing the selected font family. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A Pango::FontFamily representing the * selected font family. Font families are a collection of font @@ -227,8 +205,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_family(); /** Gets the Pango::FontFamily representing the selected font family. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A Pango::FontFamily representing the * selected font family. Font families are a collection of font @@ -241,8 +217,6 @@ public: /** Gets the Pango::FontFace representing the selected font group * details (i.e.\ family, slant, weight, width, etc). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A Pango::FontFace representing the * selected font group details. The returned object is owned by * @a fontsel and must not be modified or freed. @@ -252,8 +226,6 @@ public: /** Gets the Pango::FontFace representing the selected font group * details (i.e.\ family, slant, weight, width, etc). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return A Pango::FontFace representing the * selected font group details. The returned object is owned by * @a fontsel and must not be modified or freed. @@ -262,8 +234,6 @@ public: /** The selected font size. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A n integer representing the selected font size, * or -1 if no font size is selected. @@ -487,8 +457,6 @@ public: /** Gets the 'OK' button. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The Gtk::Widget used in the dialog * for the 'OK' button. @@ -496,8 +464,6 @@ public: Button* get_ok_button(); /** Gets the 'OK' button. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The Gtk::Widget used in the dialog * for the 'OK' button. @@ -506,8 +472,6 @@ public: /** Gets the 'Cancel' button. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The Gtk::Widget used in the dialog * for the 'Cancel' button. @@ -515,8 +479,6 @@ public: Button* get_cancel_button(); /** Gets the 'Cancel' button. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The Gtk::Widget used in the dialog * for the 'Cancel' button. @@ -525,8 +487,6 @@ public: /** Obtains a button. The button doesn't have any function. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * Deprecated: 2.16: Don't use this function. * @@ -535,8 +495,6 @@ public: Button* get_apply_button(); /** Obtains a button. The button doesn't have any function. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * Deprecated: 2.16: Don't use this function. * diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/handlebox.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/handlebox.h index fae43b045a..c4a510c28a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/handlebox.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/handlebox.h @@ -146,8 +146,6 @@ public: /** Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return true if the child is currently detached, otherwise false. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconinfo.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconinfo.h index ada964367d..bcda05950c 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconinfo.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconinfo.h @@ -103,8 +103,6 @@ public: * the same base size as the larger icons to which * they are attached. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The base size, or 0, if no base * size is known for the icon. */ @@ -116,8 +114,6 @@ public: * no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this * case, you should use get_builtin_pixbuf(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The filename for the icon, or 0 * if get_builtin_pixbuf() should * be used instead. @@ -129,8 +125,6 @@ public: * Gtk::ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to * Gtk::IconTheme::lookup_icon(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The built-in image pixbuf, or 0. * The returned image must not be modified. */ @@ -141,8 +135,6 @@ public: * Gtk::ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to * Gtk::IconTheme::lookup_icon(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The built-in image pixbuf, or 0. * The returned image must not be modified. */ @@ -160,8 +152,6 @@ public: * the Gtk::IconInfo. If this flag has been specified, the pixbuf * returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The rendered icon; this may be a newly * created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must * not modify the icon. Use Glib::object_unref() to release your reference @@ -184,8 +174,6 @@ public: * This function is provided primarily to allow compatibility wrappers * for older API's, and is not expected to be useful for applications. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param raw_coordinates Whether the coordinates of embedded rectangles * and attached points should be returned in their original * (unscaled) form. @@ -198,8 +186,6 @@ public: * See set_raw_coordinates() for further * information about the coordinate system. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param rectangle Gdk::Rectangle in which to store embedded * rectangle coordinates; coordinates are only stored * when this function returns true. @@ -212,8 +198,6 @@ public: * string to be used in place of the icon name in a user * visible context like a list of icons. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The display name for the icon or 0, if * the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value * is owned @a icon_info and must not be modified or free. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/icontheme.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/icontheme.h index cfc44cd6f2..82235a59a6 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/icontheme.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/icontheme.h @@ -205,8 +205,6 @@ public: /** Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See * get_for_screen(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A unique Gtk::IconTheme associated with * the default screen. This icon theme is associated with * the screen and can be used as long as the screen @@ -223,8 +221,6 @@ public: * and setting the screen yourself; by using this function * a single icon theme object will be shared between users. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen. * @return A unique Gtk::IconTheme associated with * the given screen. This icon theme is associated with @@ -237,8 +233,6 @@ public: * to track the user's currently configured icon theme, * which might be different for different screens. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen. */ void set_screen(const Glib::RefPtr& screen); @@ -248,8 +242,6 @@ public: /** Appends a directory to the search path. * See set_search_path(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param path Directory name to append to the icon path. */ void append_search_path(const Glib::ustring& path); @@ -257,8 +249,6 @@ public: /** Prepends a directory to the search path. * See set_search_path(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param path Directory name to prepend to the icon path. */ void prepend_search_path(const Glib::ustring& path); @@ -268,8 +258,6 @@ public: * on the icon theme objects returned from get_default() * and get_for_screen(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param theme_name Name of icon theme to use instead of configured theme, * or 0 to unset a previously set custom theme. */ @@ -278,8 +266,6 @@ public: /** Checks whether an icon theme includes an icon * for a particular name. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param icon_name The name of an icon. * @return true if @a icon_theme includes an * icon for @a icon_name. @@ -301,8 +287,6 @@ public: * @return An IconInfo structure containing information * about the icon. IconInfo::operator bool() will return false if the icon wasn't found. * For instance, if (icon_info) { ... }. - * - * @newin{2,4}. */ IconInfo lookup_icon(const Glib::ustring& icon_name, int size, IconLookupFlags flags) const; @@ -312,8 +296,6 @@ public: * The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using * Gtk::IconInfo::load_icon(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param icon The Icon to look up. * @param size Desired icon size. * @param flags Flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup. @@ -340,8 +322,6 @@ public: * @return A Gtk::IconInfo structure containing information * about the icon. IconInfo::operator bool() will be false if the icon wasn't found - * for instance, if (icon_info) { ... }. - * - * @newin{2,12}. */ IconInfo choose_icon(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& icon_names, int size, IconLookupFlags flags); @@ -359,8 +339,6 @@ public: * returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old * icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param icon_name The name of the icon to lookup. * @param size The desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be exactly this size; see Gtk::IconInfo::load_icon(). * @param flags Flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup. @@ -380,8 +358,6 @@ public: * @param context A string identifying a particular type of icon. * @return The names of all the * icons in the theme. - * - * @newin{2,4}. */ Glib::ListHandle list_icons(const Glib::ustring& context) const; @@ -389,8 +365,6 @@ public: * * @return A list holding the names of all the * icons in the theme. - * - * @newin{2,10}. */ Glib::ListHandle list_icons() const; @@ -400,8 +374,6 @@ public: * * @return A list holding the names of all the * contexts in the theme. - * - * @newin{2,12}. */ Glib::ListHandle list_contexts() const; @@ -409,8 +381,6 @@ public: /** Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the * current theme (for instance, to use when presenting * a list of themes to the user.) - * - * @newin{2,4} */ Glib::ustring get_example_icon_name() const; @@ -418,8 +388,6 @@ public: * currently cached information is discarded and will be reloaded * next time @a icon_theme is accessed. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the icon theme has changed and needed * to be reloaded. */ @@ -439,8 +407,6 @@ public: * This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded * via gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param icon_name The name of the icon to register. * @param size The size at which to register the icon (different * images can be registered for the same icon name diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconview.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconview.h index 141701482d..da822dcecb 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconview.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconview.h @@ -169,8 +169,6 @@ public: * it before setting the new model. Use unset_model() to * unset the old model. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param model The model. */ void set_model(const Glib::RefPtr& model); @@ -178,8 +176,6 @@ public: /** Returns the model the Gtk::IconView is based on. Returns 0 if the * model is unset. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return A Gtk::TreeModel, or 0 if none is * currently being used. */ @@ -188,8 +184,6 @@ public: /** Returns the model the Gtk::IconView is based on. Returns 0 if the * model is unset. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return A Gtk::TreeModel, or 0 if none is * currently being used. */ @@ -198,8 +192,6 @@ public: /** Remove the model from the IconView. * * @see set_model(). - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void unset_model(); @@ -207,8 +199,6 @@ public: /** Sets the column with text for @a icon_view to be @a column. The text * column must be of type TYPE_STRING. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text. */ void set_text_column(int column); @@ -216,15 +206,11 @@ public: /** Sets the column with text for @a icon_view to be @a column. The text * column must be of type TYPE_STRING. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text. */ void set_text_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& model_column); /** Returns the column with text for @a icon_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The text column, or -1 if it's unset. */ @@ -235,8 +221,6 @@ public: * If the markup column is set to something, it overrides * the text column set by set_text_column(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text. */ void set_markup_column(int column); @@ -246,15 +230,11 @@ public: * If the markup column is set to something, it overrides * the text column set by set_text_column(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text. */ void set_markup_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& column); /** Returns the column with markup text for @a icon_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The markup column, or -1 if it's unset. */ @@ -263,8 +243,6 @@ public: /** Sets the column with pixbufs for @a icon_view to be @a column. The pixbuf * column must be of type Gdk::TYPE_PIXBUF * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to disable. */ void set_pixbuf_column(int column); @@ -272,15 +250,11 @@ public: /** Sets the column with pixbufs for @a icon_view to be @a column. The pixbuf * column must be of type Gdk::TYPE_PIXBUF * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to disable. */ void set_pixbuf_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& column); /** Returns the column with pixbufs for @a icon_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset. */ @@ -290,8 +264,6 @@ public: /** Sets the property_orientation() property which determines whether the labels * are drawn beside the icons instead of below. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * Deprecated: 2.22: Use set_item_orientation() * * @param orientation The relative position of texts and icons. @@ -301,8 +273,6 @@ public: /** Returns the value of the property_orientation() property which determines * whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_item_orientation() * * @return The relative position of texts and icons. @@ -313,8 +283,6 @@ public: /** Sets the property_item_orientation() property which determines whether * the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param orientation The relative position of texts and icons. */ void set_item_orientation(Orientation orientation); @@ -322,8 +290,6 @@ public: /** Returns the value of the property_item_orientation() property which determines * whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return The relative position of texts and icons. */ Orientation get_item_orientation() const; @@ -334,15 +300,11 @@ public: * -1, the number of columns will be chosen automatically * to fill the available area. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param columns The number of columns. */ void set_columns(int columns); /** Returns the value of the property_columns() property. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The number of columns, or -1. */ @@ -352,15 +314,11 @@ public: * to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will * automatically determine a suitable item size. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param item_width The width for each item. */ void set_item_width(int item_width); /** Returns the value of the property_item_width() property. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The width of a single item, or -1. */ @@ -370,15 +328,11 @@ public: * which is inserted between the cells (i.e.\ the icon and * the text) of an item. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param spacing The spacing. */ void set_spacing(int spacing); /** Returns the value of the property_spacing() property. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The space between cells. */ @@ -387,15 +341,11 @@ public: /** Sets the property_row_spacing() property which specifies the space * which is inserted between the rows of the icon view. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param row_spacing The row spacing. */ void set_row_spacing(int row_spacing); /** Returns the value of the property_row_spacing() property. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The space between rows. */ @@ -404,15 +354,11 @@ public: /** Sets the property_column_spacing() property which specifies the space * which is inserted between the columns of the icon view. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param column_spacing The column spacing. */ void set_column_spacing(int column_spacing); /** Returns the value of the property_column_spacing() property. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The space between columns. */ @@ -423,15 +369,11 @@ public: * which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right * of the icon view. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param margin The margin. */ void set_margin(int margin); /** Returns the value of the property_margin() property. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The space at the borders. */ @@ -444,8 +386,6 @@ public: * See convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords() for converting * widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param x The x position to be identified. * @param y The y position to be identified. * @return The Gtk::TreePath corresponding to the icon or 0 @@ -462,8 +402,6 @@ public: * @param cell The renderer responsible for the cell at (@a x, @a y). * * @result true if an item exists at the specified position. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ bool get_item_at_pos(int x, int y, TreeModel::Path& path, CellRenderer*& cell) const; @@ -474,8 +412,6 @@ public: * @param path The path. * * @result true if an item exists at the specified position. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ bool get_item_at_pos(int x, int y, TreeModel::Path& path) const; @@ -486,8 +422,6 @@ public: * @param path The path. * * @result true if an item exists at the specified position. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ bool get_item_at_pos(int x, int y, CellRenderer*& cell) const; @@ -511,32 +445,24 @@ public: //Default value?: /** Sets the selection mode of the @a icon_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param mode The selection mode. */ void set_selection_mode(SelectionMode mode); /** Gets the selection mode of the @a icon_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The current selection mode. */ SelectionMode get_selection_mode() const; /** Selects the row at @a path. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param path The Gtk::TreePath to be selected. */ void select_path(const TreeModel::Path& path); /** Unselects the row at @a path. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param path The Gtk::TreePath to be unselected. */ @@ -545,8 +471,6 @@ public: /** Returns true if the icon pointed to by @a path is currently * selected. If @a path does not point to a valid location, false is returned. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param path A Gtk::TreePath to check selection on. * @return true if @a path is selected. */ @@ -580,8 +504,6 @@ public: * * [C example ellipted] * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return A List containing a Gtk::TreePath for each selected row. */ ArrayHandle_TreePaths get_selected_items() const; @@ -589,20 +511,14 @@ public: /** Selects all the icons. @a icon_view must has its selection mode set * to Gtk::SELECTION_MULTIPLE. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ void select_all(); /** Unselects all the icons. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ void unselect_all(); /** Activates the item determined by @a path. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param path The Gtk::TreePath to be activated. */ @@ -620,8 +536,6 @@ public: * (icon_view) in order to give keyboard focus to the widget. * Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param path A Gtk::TreePath. * @param cell One of the cell renderers of @a icon_view, or 0. * @param start_editing true if the specified cell should start being edited. @@ -635,8 +549,6 @@ public: * @param path The current cursor path. * @param cell The current focus cell. * @result true if the cursor is set. - * - * @newin{2,8} */ bool get_cursor(TreeModel::Path& path, CellRenderer*& cell) const; @@ -646,8 +558,6 @@ public: * * @param path The current cursor path. * @result true if the cursor is set. - * - * @newin{2,8} */ bool get_cursor(TreeModel::Path& path) const; @@ -657,8 +567,6 @@ public: * * @param cell The current focus cell. * @result true if the cursor is set. - * - * @newin{2,8} */ bool get_cursor(CellRenderer*& cell) const; @@ -678,8 +586,6 @@ public: * the model. If the model changes before the @a icon_view is realized, the * centered path will be modified to reflect this change. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param path The path of the item to move to. * @param use_align Whether to use alignment arguments, or false. * @param row_align The vertical alignment of the item specified by @a path. @@ -710,15 +616,11 @@ public: /** Undoes the effect of enable_model_drag_source(). Calling this * method sets Gtk::IconView::property_reorderable() to false. - * - * @newin{2,8} */ void unset_model_drag_source(); /** Undoes the effect of enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this * method sets Gtk::IconView::property_reorderable() to false. - * - * @newin{2,8} */ void unset_model_drag_dest(); @@ -736,8 +638,6 @@ public: * reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably * handle drag and drop manually. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param reorderable true, if the list of items can be reordered. */ void set_reorderable(bool reorderable = true); @@ -745,8 +645,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop. * See set_reorderable(). * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return true if the list can be reordered. */ bool get_reorderable() const; @@ -756,8 +654,6 @@ public: //TODO: Discover what arguments are output arguments: /** Sets the item that is highlighted for feedback. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @param path The path of the item to highlight, or 0. * @param pos Specifies where to drop, relative to the item. @@ -768,24 +664,18 @@ public: * * @param path The highlighted item. * @pos The drop position. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void get_drag_dest_item(TreeModel::Path& path, IconViewDropPosition& pos) const; /** Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback. * * @param path The highlighted item. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void get_drag_dest_item(TreeModel::Path& path) const; /** Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback. * * @pos The drop position. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void get_drag_dest_item(IconViewDropPosition& pos) const; @@ -797,8 +687,6 @@ public: * @param path The path of the item. * @param pos: The drop position. * @result whether there is an item at the given position. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ bool get_dest_item_at_pos(int drag_x, int drag_y, TreeModel::Path& path, IconViewDropPosition& pos) const; @@ -808,8 +696,6 @@ public: * @param drag_y the position to determine the destination item for. * @param path The path of the item. * @result whether there is an item at the given position. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ bool get_dest_item_at_pos(int drag_x, int drag_y, TreeModel::Path& path) const; @@ -819,8 +705,6 @@ public: * @param drag_y the position to determine the destination item for. * @param pos: The drop position. * @result whether there is an item at the given position. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ bool get_dest_item_at_pos(int drag_x, int drag_y, IconViewDropPosition& pos) const; @@ -828,8 +712,6 @@ public: /** Creates a Gdk::Pixmap representation of the item at @a path. * This image is used for a drag icon. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param path A Gtk::TreePath in @a icon_view. * @return A newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon. */ @@ -839,8 +721,6 @@ public: /** Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window, * as expected by e.g.\ get_path_at_pos(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param wx X coordinate relative to the widget. * @param wy Y coordinate relative to the widget. * @param bx Return location for bin_window X coordinate. @@ -852,8 +732,6 @@ public: /** Sets the tip area of @a tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @a path. * See also Tooltip::set_tip_area(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param tooltip A Gtk::Tooltip. * @param path A Gtk::TreePath. */ @@ -862,8 +740,6 @@ public: /** Sets the tip area of @a tooltip to the area which @a cell occupies in * the item pointed to by @a path. See also Tooltip::set_tip_area(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param tooltip A Gtk::Tooltip. * @param path A Gtk::TreePath. * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer. @@ -872,8 +748,6 @@ public: /** Sets the tip area of @a tooltip to the area occupied by * the item pointed to by @a path. See also Tooltip::set_tip_area(). - * - * @newin{2,12} * @param tooltip A Gtk::Tooltip. * @param path A Gtk::TreePath. */ @@ -899,8 +773,6 @@ public: * to be relative to IconView's bin_window if keyboard_tooltip is false. * * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ bool get_tooltip_context_path(int& x, int& y, bool keyboard_tip, @@ -925,8 +797,6 @@ public: * to be relative to IconView's bin_window if keyboard_tooltip is false. * * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ bool get_tooltip_context_iter(int& x, int& y, bool keyboard_tip, @@ -941,8 +811,6 @@ public: * When enabled, Gtk::Widget::signal_has_tooltip() will be set to true and * @a icon_view will connect a Gtk::Widget::signal_query_tooltip() signal handler. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param column An integer, which is a valid column number for @a icon_view's model. */ void set_tooltip_column(int column); @@ -950,8 +818,6 @@ public: /** Returns the column of @a icon_view's model which is being used for * displaying tooltips on @a icon_view's rows. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The index of the tooltip column that is currently being * used, or -1 if this is disabled. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/image.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/image.h index df849dd481..71e967bcf6 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/image.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/image.h @@ -210,8 +210,6 @@ public: * * @param icon_set An IconSet * @param size A stock icon size. - * - * @newin{2,24} */ explicit Image(const IconSet& icon_set, IconSize icon_size); @@ -304,8 +302,6 @@ public: void set(const Glib::RefPtr& animation); /** See new_from_gicon() for details. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @param icon An icon. * @param size An icon size. @@ -318,8 +314,6 @@ public: * displayed instead. If the current icon theme is changed, the icon * will be updated appropriately. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param icon_name An icon name. * @param size A stock icon size. */ @@ -327,8 +321,6 @@ public: /** Resets the image to be empty. - * - * @newin{2,8} */ void clear(); @@ -395,8 +387,6 @@ public: * IMAGE_GICON (see get_storage_type()). * * @param icon_size A place to store an icon size. - * - * @newin{2,14} */ Glib::RefPtr get_gicon(Gtk::IconSize& icon_size); @@ -405,8 +395,6 @@ public: * IMAGE_GICON (see get_storage_type()). * * @param icon_size A place to store an icon size. - * - * @newin{2,14} */ Glib::RefPtr get_gicon(Gtk::IconSize& icon_size) const; @@ -416,8 +404,6 @@ public: /** Gets the pixel size used for named icons. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The pixel size used for named icons. */ @@ -427,8 +413,6 @@ public: * to a value != -1, it is used instead of the icon size set by * set_from_icon_name(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param pixel_size The new pixel size. */ void set_pixel_size(int pixel_size); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/imagemenuitem.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/imagemenuitem.h index ec936e7d34..4d237476b1 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/imagemenuitem.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/imagemenuitem.h @@ -122,8 +122,6 @@ public: * Use this property if the menuitem would be useless or hard to use * without the image. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param always_show true if the menuitem should always show the image. */ void set_always_show_image(bool always_show = true); @@ -131,8 +129,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the menu item will ignore the Gtk::Settings::property_gtk_menu_images() * setting and always show the image, if available. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @return true if the menu item will always show the image. */ bool get_always_show_image() const; @@ -164,8 +160,6 @@ public: /** If true, the label set in the menuitem is used as a * stock id to select the stock item for the item. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param use_stock true if the menuitem should use a stock item. */ void set_use_stock(bool use_stock = true); @@ -173,8 +167,6 @@ public: /** Checks whether the label set in the menuitem is used as a * stock id to select the stock item for the item. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @return true if the label set in the menuitem is used as a * stock id to select the stock item for the item. */ @@ -188,8 +180,6 @@ public: * If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then * you shouldnt need this (see new_from_stock()). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param accel_group The Gtk::AccelGroup. */ void set_accel_group(const Glib::RefPtr& accel_group); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/infobar.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/infobar.h index 9df0995583..8ad9c26d6a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/infobar.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/infobar.h @@ -61,8 +61,6 @@ namespace Gtk * The InfoBar widget looks like * @image html infobar1.png * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @ingroup Widgets */ @@ -130,16 +128,12 @@ public: //TODO: What types are these widgets really? /** Returns the action area of @a info_bar. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return The action area. */ Widget* get_action_area(); /** Returns the action area of @a info_bar. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return The action area. */ @@ -147,16 +141,12 @@ public: /** Returns the content area of @a info_bar. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return The content area. */ Widget* get_content_area(); /** Returns the content area of @a info_bar. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return The content area. */ @@ -168,8 +158,6 @@ public: * signal on the message area when the widget is activated. The widget * is appended to the end of the message areas action area. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param child An activatable widget. * @param response_id Response ID for @a child. */ @@ -182,8 +170,6 @@ public: * to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is * returned, but usually you don't need it. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param button_text Text of button, or stock ID. * @param response_id Response ID for the button. * @return The button widget that was added. @@ -196,8 +182,6 @@ public: * to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is * returned, but usually you don't need it. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param button_text Text of button, or stock ID. * @param response_id Response ID for the button. * @return The button widget that was added. @@ -209,8 +193,6 @@ public: * widget in the info bars's action area with the given response_id. * A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param response_id A response ID. * @param setting true for sensitive. */ @@ -223,16 +205,12 @@ public: * Note that this function currently requires @a info_bar to * be added to a widget hierarchy. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param response_id A response ID. */ void set_default_response(int response_id); /** Emits the 'response' signal with the given @a response_id. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @param response_id A response ID. */ @@ -243,15 +221,11 @@ public: * GTK+ uses this type to determine what color to use * when drawing the message area. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param message_type A Gtk::MessageType. */ void set_message_type(MessageType message_type); /** Returns the message type of the message area. - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return The message type of the message area. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/invisible.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/invisible.h index 0bd874b27d..b227788ef6 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/invisible.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/invisible.h @@ -107,24 +107,18 @@ public: /** Returns the Gdk::Screen object associated with @a invisible - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The associated Gdk::Screen. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen(); /** Returns the Gdk::Screen object associated with @a invisible - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The associated Gdk::Screen. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen() const; /** Sets the Gdk::Screen where the Gtk::Invisible object will be displayed. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/label.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/label.h index 55cfca5c5f..bd65e3eb0d 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/label.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/label.h @@ -329,15 +329,11 @@ public: /** Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") to the text * if there is not enough space to render the entire string. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param mode A Pango::EllipsizeMode. */ void set_ellipsize(Pango::EllipsizeMode mode); /** Returns the ellipsizing position of the label. See set_ellipsize(). - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return Pango::EllipsizeMode. */ @@ -345,8 +341,6 @@ public: /** Sets the desired width in characters of @a label to @a n_chars. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param n_chars The new desired width, in characters. */ @@ -355,16 +349,12 @@ public: /** Retrieves the desired width of @a label, in characters. See * set_width_chars(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The width of the label in characters. */ int get_width_chars() const; /** Sets the desired maximum width in characters of @a label to @a n_chars. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param n_chars The new desired maximum width, in characters. */ @@ -373,8 +363,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the desired maximum width of @a label, in characters. See * set_width_chars(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The maximum width of the label in characters. */ int get_max_width_chars() const; @@ -407,15 +395,11 @@ public: * the line wrapping is done. The default is Pango::WRAP_WORD which means * wrap on word boundaries. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param wrap_mode The line wrapping mode. */ void set_line_wrap_mode(Pango::WrapMode wrap_mode); /** Returns line wrap mode used by the label. See set_line_wrap_mode(). - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return true if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped. */ @@ -439,8 +423,6 @@ public: * setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable, * wrapped, or ellipsized. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param angle The angle that the baseline of the label makes with * the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise. */ @@ -449,8 +431,6 @@ public: /** Gets the angle of rotation for the label. See * set_angle(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The angle of rotation for the label. */ double get_angle() const; @@ -517,16 +497,12 @@ public: /** Sets whether the label is in single line mode. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @param single_line_mode true if the label should be in single line mode. */ void set_single_line_mode(bool single_line_mode = true); /** Returns whether the label is in single line mode. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return true when the label is in single line mode. */ @@ -541,8 +517,6 @@ public: * This function is intended for use in a Gtk::Label::signal_activate_link() handler * or for use in a Gtk::Widget::signal_query_tooltip() handler. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return The currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must * not be freed or modified. */ @@ -552,8 +526,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the label should keep track of clicked * links (and use a different color for them). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param track_links true to track visited links. */ void set_track_visited_links(bool track_links = true); @@ -561,8 +533,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the label is currently keeping track * of clicked links. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if clicked links are remembered. */ bool get_track_visited_links() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/layout.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/layout.h index 6494d5c295..71db399535 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/layout.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/layout.h @@ -124,16 +124,12 @@ public: /** Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A Gdk::Window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_bin_window(); /** Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return A Gdk::Window. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/linkbutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/linkbutton.h index 87d48bd9a2..2e1c5321fe 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/linkbutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/linkbutton.h @@ -54,8 +54,6 @@ namespace Gtk * * The LinkButton widget looks like this: * @image html linkbutton1.png - * - * @newin{2,10} * @ingroup Widgets */ @@ -121,8 +119,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the URI set using set_uri(). - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A valid URI. The returned string is owned by the link button * and should not be modified or freed. @@ -132,8 +128,6 @@ public: /** Sets @a uri as the URI where the Gtk::LinkButton points. As a side-effect * this unsets the 'visited' state of the button. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param uri A valid URI. */ void set_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri); @@ -145,8 +139,6 @@ public: * * The state may also be changed using set_visited(). * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return true if the link has been visited, false otherwise. */ bool get_visited() const; @@ -154,8 +146,6 @@ public: /** Sets the 'visited' state of the URI where the Gtk::LinkButton * points. See get_visited() for more details. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param visited The new 'visited' state. */ void set_visited(bool visited = true); @@ -175,8 +165,6 @@ public: * This function is called before every signal handler registered for the "clicked" signal. * * @param slot A function called each time a LinkButton is clicked. - * @newin{2,12} - * * @deprecated Use Button::signal_clicked() instead. */ static void set_uri_hook(const SlotUri& slot); @@ -184,8 +172,6 @@ public: /** Unsets any previously set slot as the function that should be invoked every time a user clicks a LinkButton. * @see set_uri_hook(). - * @newin{2, - * * @deprecated Use Button::signal_clicked() instead. */ static void unset_uri_hook(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/liststore.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/liststore.h index f60a8b1d3c..dfa363da5e 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/liststore.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/liststore.h @@ -186,8 +186,6 @@ public: /** Swaps @a a and @a b in @a store. Note that this function only works with * unsorted stores. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param a A Gtk::TreeIter. * @param b Another Gtk::TreeIter. */ @@ -216,8 +214,6 @@ public: * * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this Gtk::ListStore. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param iter A Gtk::TreeIter. * @return true if the iter is valid, false if the iter is invalid. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/listviewtext.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/listviewtext.h index e15470a9e8..e663081559 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/listviewtext.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/listviewtext.h @@ -35,8 +35,6 @@ namespace Gtk * @ingroup Widgets * @ingroup Containers * @ingroup TreeView - * - * @newin{2,10} */ class ListViewText : public Gtk::TreeView { diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menu.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menu.h index 07ae985a94..7b551c7a79 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menu.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menu.h @@ -225,8 +225,6 @@ public: void set_accel_path(const Glib::ustring& accel_path); /** Retrieves the accelerator path set on the menu. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The accelerator path set on the menu. */ @@ -277,8 +275,6 @@ public: Glib::ustring get_title() const; /** Sets the Gdk::Screen on which the menu will be displayed. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen, or 0 if the screen should be * determined by the widget the menu is attached to. @@ -294,8 +290,6 @@ public: * * Note that this function is not related to detach(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param child A Gtk::MenuItem. * @param left_attach The column number to attach the left side of the item to. * @param right_attach The column number to attach the right side of the item to. @@ -314,16 +308,12 @@ public: * by a Gtk::MenuPositionFunc, since, for very long menus, these coordinates * may extend beyond the monitor boundaries or even the screen boundaries. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param monitor_num The number of the monitor on which the menu should * be popped up. */ void set_monitor(int monitor_num); /** Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The number of the monitor on which the menu should * be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set. @@ -336,8 +326,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether the menu should reserve space for drawing toggles * or icons, regardless of their actual presence. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param reserve_toggle_size Whether to reserve size for toggles. */ void set_reserve_toggle_size(bool reserve_toggle_size = true); @@ -345,8 +333,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the menu reserves space for toggles and * icons, regardless of their actual presence. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return Whether the menu reserves toggle space. */ bool get_reserve_toggle_size() const; @@ -476,8 +462,6 @@ protected: /** Attaches the menu to the widget. * * param @attach_widget: the Widget that the menu will be attached to. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void attach_to_widget(Widget& attach_widget); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menubar.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menubar.h index 7f0df176f3..28896d04a2 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menubar.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menubar.h @@ -152,15 +152,11 @@ public: /** Retrieves the current pack direction of the menubar. * See set_pack_direction(). * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return The pack direction. */ PackDirection get_pack_direction() const; /** Sets how items should be packed inside a menubar. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @param pack_dir A new Gtk::PackDirection. */ @@ -169,15 +165,11 @@ public: /** Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar. * See set_child_pack_direction(). * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return The child pack direction. */ PackDirection get_child_pack_direction() const; /** Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @param child_pack_dir A new Gtk::PackDirection. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menuitem.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menuitem.h index e1158cf3bd..e48cbe0dd2 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menuitem.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menuitem.h @@ -137,7 +137,6 @@ public: void set_submenu(Menu& submenu); /** Remove the menu item's sub-menu. - * @newin{2,22} */ void unset_submenu(); @@ -224,24 +223,18 @@ public: * * See set_accel_path() for details. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The accelerator path corresponding to this menu item's * functionality, or 0 if not set. */ Glib::ustring get_accel_path() const; /** Sets @a text on the @a menu_item label - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param label The text you want to set. */ void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label); /** Sets @a text on the @a menu_item label - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The text in the @a menu_item label. This is the internal * string used by the label, and must not be modified. @@ -251,8 +244,6 @@ public: /** If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be * used for the mnemonic accelerator key. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param setting true if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics. */ void set_use_underline(bool setting = true); @@ -260,8 +251,6 @@ public: /** Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character should be * used for the mnemonic accelerator key. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @return true if an embedded underline in the label indicates * the mnemonic accelerator key. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menushell.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menushell.h index 3ba2db10e5..a96938fe59 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menushell.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menushell.h @@ -198,8 +198,6 @@ public: * don't select tearoff items unless the only item is a tearoff * item. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param search_sensitive If true, search for the first selectable * menu item, otherwise select nothing if * the first item isn't sensitive. This @@ -211,8 +209,6 @@ public: void deactivate(); /** Cancels the selection within the menu shell. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void cancel(); @@ -289,8 +285,6 @@ public: /** Returns true if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return true if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup. */ @@ -322,8 +316,6 @@ public: * * See also gdk_keyboard_grab() * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param take_focus true if the menu shell should take the keyboard focus on popup. */ void set_take_focus(bool take_focus = true); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menutoolbutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menutoolbutton.h index 5096421d45..ef0d89a311 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menutoolbutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menutoolbutton.h @@ -142,15 +142,11 @@ public: /** Sets the Gtk::Menu that is popped up when the user clicks on the arrow. * If @a menu is 0, the arrow button becomes insensitive. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param menu The Gtk::Menu associated with Gtk::MenuToolButton. */ void set_menu(Menu& menu); /** Gets the Gtk::Menu associated with Gtk::MenuToolButton. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The Gtk::Menu associated * with Gtk::MenuToolButton. @@ -158,8 +154,6 @@ public: Menu* get_menu(); /** Gets the Gtk::Menu associated with Gtk::MenuToolButton. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return The Gtk::Menu associated * with Gtk::MenuToolButton. @@ -173,8 +167,6 @@ public: * pops up the menu. See Gtk::ToolItem::set_tooltip() for setting * a tooltip on the whole Gtk::MenuToolButton. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * Deprecated: 2.12: Use set_arrow_tooltip_text() * instead. * @@ -192,8 +184,6 @@ public: * pops up the menu. See Gtk::ToolItem::set_tooltip() for setting a tooltip * on the whole Gtk::MenuToolButton. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param text Text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button. */ void set_arrow_tooltip_text(const Glib::ustring& text); @@ -202,8 +192,6 @@ public: * which pops up the menu. See Gtk::ToolItem::set_tooltip() for setting a * tooltip on the whole Gtk::MenuToolButton. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param markup Markup text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button. */ void set_arrow_tooltip_markup(const Glib::ustring& markup); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/messagedialog.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/messagedialog.h index 0f08b3dacc..fe5997f830 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/messagedialog.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/messagedialog.h @@ -157,24 +157,18 @@ public: /** Sets the dialog's image to @a image. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param image The image. */ void set_image(Widget& image); /** Gets the dialog's image. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The dialog's image. */ Widget* get_image(); /** Gets the dialog's image. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The dialog's image. */ @@ -187,8 +181,6 @@ public: * up with the Pango text markup * language. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @deprecated Use set_message(string, true). * * @param str Markup string (see Pango markup format). @@ -208,8 +200,6 @@ public: /** Sets the secondary text of the message dialog. * Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become bold, unless you have provided explicit markup. * - * @newin{2,6}. - * * @param text The message. * @param use_markup Whether @a message contains pango markup. */ @@ -223,8 +213,6 @@ public: * languages). See Gtk::Dialog::get_content_area() for the corresponding * function in the parent Gtk::Dialog. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return A Gtk::VBox corresponding to the * "message area" in the @a message_dialog. */ @@ -237,8 +225,6 @@ public: * languages). See Gtk::Dialog::get_content_area() for the corresponding * function in the parent Gtk::Dialog. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @return A Gtk::VBox corresponding to the * "message area" in the @a message_dialog. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/notebook.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/notebook.h index 3dd60633d5..69173bb2e0 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/notebook.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/notebook.h @@ -535,8 +535,6 @@ public: * the same group identificator will be able to exchange tabs * via drag and drop. A notebook with group identificator -1 will * not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook. - * - * @newin{2,10} * Deprecated: 2.12: use set_group_name() instead. * * @param group_id A group identificator, or -1 to unset it. @@ -548,8 +546,6 @@ public: #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Gets the current group identificator for @a notebook. - * - * @newin{2,10} * Deprecated: 2.12: use get_group_name() instead. * * @return The group identificator, or -1 if none is set. @@ -567,8 +563,6 @@ public: * via drag and drop. A notebook with a 0 group identificator will * not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use set_group_name() instead * * @param group A pointer to identify the notebook group, or 0 to unset it. @@ -580,8 +574,6 @@ public: #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Gets the current group identificator pointer for @a notebook. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use get_group_name() instead * @@ -595,8 +587,6 @@ public: #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Gets the current group identificator pointer for @a notebook. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * Deprecated: 2.24: Use get_group_name() instead * @@ -613,8 +603,6 @@ public: * via drag and drop. A notebook with a 0 group name will * not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook. * - * @newin{2,24} - * * @param name The name of the notebook group, or 0 to unset it. */ void set_group_name(const Glib::ustring& group_name); @@ -627,8 +615,6 @@ public: * * Return Value: (transfer none): the group name, * or 0 if none is set. - * - * @newin{2,24} */ Glib::ustring get_group_name() const; @@ -662,8 +648,6 @@ public: #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED /** Gets the number of pages in a notebook. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @deprecated Use the const method. * @@ -674,8 +658,6 @@ public: /** Gets the number of pages in a notebook. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The number of pages in the notebook. */ @@ -793,16 +775,12 @@ public: /** Returns the horizontal width of a tab border. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return Horizontal width of a tab border. */ guint16 get_tab_hborder() const; /** Returns the vertical width of a tab border. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return Vertical width of a tab border. */ @@ -944,8 +922,6 @@ public: /** Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param child A child Gtk::Widget. * @return true if the tab is reorderable. @@ -955,16 +931,12 @@ public: /** Sets whether the notebook tab can be reordered * via drag and drop or not. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param child A child Gtk::Widget. * @param reorderable Whether the tab is reorderable or not. */ void set_tab_reorderable(Widget& child, bool reorderable = true); /** Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from @a notebook. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param child A child Gtk::Widget. * @return true if the tab is detachable. @@ -989,8 +961,6 @@ public: * If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets, * you will have to set your own DnD code to do it. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param child A child Gtk::Widget. * @param detachable Whether the tab is detachable or not. */ @@ -998,8 +968,6 @@ public: /** Gets one of the action widgets. See set_action_widget(). - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param pack_type Pack type of the action widget to receive. * @return The action widget with the given @a pack_type @@ -1014,8 +982,6 @@ public: * Note that action widgets are "internal" children of the notebook and thus * not included in the list returned from Gtk::Container::foreach(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget. * @param pack_type Pack type of the action widget. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/offscreenwindow.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/offscreenwindow.h index 0c935e594a..d49c9002d6 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/offscreenwindow.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/offscreenwindow.h @@ -62,8 +62,6 @@ namespace Gtk * * When contained offscreen widgets are redrawn, OffscreenWindow * will emit a "damage-event" signal. - * - * @newin{2,20} * @ingroup Containers * @ingroup Widgets */ @@ -131,8 +129,6 @@ public: * a Gdk::Pixmap. If you need to keep this around over window * resizes then you should add a reference to it. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A Gdk::Pixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap, * or 0. */ @@ -142,8 +138,6 @@ public: * a Gdk::Pixmap. If you need to keep this around over window * resizes then you should add a reference to it. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A Gdk::Pixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap, * or 0. */ @@ -155,8 +149,6 @@ public: * and the application should unreference it once it is no longer * needed. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf pointer, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_pixbuf(); @@ -166,8 +158,6 @@ public: * and the application should unreference it once it is no longer * needed. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf pointer, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_pixbuf() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/orientable.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/orientable.h index 7f9eb57a36..bd6a8ff4c1 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/orientable.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/orientable.h @@ -57,8 +57,6 @@ namespace Gtk * subclasses of a common base class (e.g GtkBox/GtkHBox/GtkVBox and * GtkScale/GtkHScale/GtkVScale). GtkOrientable is more flexible in that it * allows the orientation to be changed at runtime, allowing the widgets to 'flip'. - * - * @newin{2,16} */ class Orientable : public Glib::Interface @@ -130,16 +128,12 @@ private: public: /** Sets the orientation of the @a orientable. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @param orientation The orientable's new orientation. */ void set_orientation(Orientation orientation); /** Retrieves the orientation of the @a orientable. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The orientation of the @a orientable. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/paned.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/paned.h index e4b2eb8a7f..32901c7a3a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/paned.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/paned.h @@ -176,16 +176,12 @@ public: /** Obtains the first child of the paned widget. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return First child, or 0 if it is not set. */ Widget* get_child1(); /** Obtains the first child of the paned widget. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return First child, or 0 if it is not set. */ @@ -193,16 +189,12 @@ public: /** Obtains the second child of the paned widget. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Second child, or 0 if it is not set. */ Widget* get_child2(); /** Obtains the second child of the paned widget. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Second child, or 0 if it is not set. */ @@ -214,8 +206,6 @@ public: * enables the callback to distinguish between the window * of the paned, a child and the handle. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The paned's handle window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_handle_window(); @@ -225,8 +215,6 @@ public: * enables the callback to distinguish between the window * of the paned, a child and the handle. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The paned's handle window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_handle_window() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/plug.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/plug.h index 322243ba03..a299b9c4c0 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/plug.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/plug.h @@ -119,8 +119,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether the plug is embedded in a socket. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return true if the plug is embedded in a socket. */ @@ -128,16 +126,12 @@ public: /** Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The window of the socket, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_socket_window(); /** Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The window of the socket, or 0. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/progressbar.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/progressbar.h index 0364958887..775fa8e72d 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/progressbar.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/progressbar.h @@ -236,8 +236,6 @@ public: /** Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") the text * if there is not enough space to render the entire string. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param mode A Pango::EllipsizeMode. */ void set_ellipsize(Pango::EllipsizeMode mode); @@ -245,8 +243,6 @@ public: /** Returns the ellipsizing position of the progressbar. * See set_ellipsize(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return Pango::EllipsizeMode. */ Pango::EllipsizeMode get_ellipsize() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radioaction.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radioaction.h index c742363f47..43e0463700 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radioaction.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radioaction.h @@ -189,8 +189,6 @@ public: * * [C example ellipted] * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The list representing the radio group for this object. */ Group get_group(); @@ -200,8 +198,6 @@ public: /** Obtains the value property of the currently active member of * the group to which @a action belongs. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The value of the currently active group member. */ int get_current_value() const; @@ -209,8 +205,6 @@ public: /** Sets the currently active group member to the member with value * property @a current_value. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param current_value The new value. */ void set_current_value(int current_value); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radiotoolbutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radiotoolbutton.h index 0562878511..a24d5b7022 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radiotoolbutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radiotoolbutton.h @@ -114,8 +114,6 @@ public: * The RadioToolButton will have an empty label and will reside in an newly created Group. * Use get_group() to retrieve this group and pass it to other radio buttons to assign * them to this group. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ RadioToolButton(); @@ -126,8 +124,6 @@ public: * * @param group The existing group which will be used for this RadioButton. * @param label The string used to display the label for this RadioToolButton. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ explicit RadioToolButton(Group& group, const Glib::ustring& label = Glib::ustring()); @@ -139,8 +135,6 @@ public: * * @param group The existing group which will be used for this RadioButton. * @param stock_id The StockID which determines the look of the RadioToolButton. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ RadioToolButton(Group& group, const Gtk::StockID& stock_id); @@ -160,23 +154,17 @@ public: * * @param icon_widget The widget placed as the RadioToolButton's icon. * @param label The string used to display the label for this RadioToolButton. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ explicit RadioToolButton(Widget& icon_widget, const Glib::ustring& label = Glib::ustring()); /** Returns the radio button group @a button belongs to. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The group @a button belongs to. */ Group get_group(); /** Adds @a button to @a group, removing it from the group it belonged to before. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param group An existing radio button group. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/range.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/range.h index ac1a3c9ee2..32e6e38fc4 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/range.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/range.h @@ -199,15 +199,11 @@ public: * * See Gtk::Widget::get_direction(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param flippable true to make the range flippable. */ void set_flippable(bool flippable = true); /** Gets the value set by set_flippable(). - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return true if the range is flippable. */ @@ -219,8 +215,6 @@ public: * * This function is useful mainly for Gtk::Range subclasses. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param size_fixed true to make the slider size constant. */ void set_slider_size_fixed(bool size_fixed = true); @@ -229,8 +223,6 @@ public: * * See set_slider_size_fixed(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return Whether the range's slider has a fixed size. */ bool get_slider_size_fixed() const; @@ -240,8 +232,6 @@ public: * * This function is useful mainly for Gtk::Range subclasses. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param min_size The slider's minimum size. */ void set_min_slider_size(bool min_size = true); @@ -250,8 +240,6 @@ public: * * See set_min_slider_size(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The minimum size of the range's slider. */ int get_min_slider_size() const; @@ -262,8 +250,6 @@ public: * This method is useful mainly for Range subclasses. * * @result The range rectangle. - * - * @@newin{2,20} */ Gdk::Rectangle get_range_rect() const; @@ -273,8 +259,6 @@ public: * * This function is useful mainly for Gtk::Range subclasses. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param slider_start Return location for the slider's start, or 0. * @param slider_end Return location for the slider's end, or 0. */ @@ -284,8 +268,6 @@ public: /** Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the * 'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param sensitivity The lower stepper's sensitivity policy. */ void set_lower_stepper_sensitivity(SensitivityType sensitivity); @@ -293,8 +275,6 @@ public: /** Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the * 'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The lower stepper's sensitivity policy. */ SensitivityType get_lower_stepper_sensitivity() const; @@ -302,8 +282,6 @@ public: /** Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the * 'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param sensitivity The upper stepper's sensitivity policy. */ void set_upper_stepper_sensitivity(SensitivityType sensitivity); @@ -311,8 +289,6 @@ public: /** Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the * 'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The upper stepper's sensitivity policy. */ SensitivityType get_upper_stepper_sensitivity() const; @@ -357,15 +333,11 @@ public: * set_fill_level() for a general description of the fill * level concept. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param show_fill_level Whether a fill level indicator graphics is shown. */ void set_show_fill_level(bool show_fill_level = true); /** Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * @return true if @a range shows the fill level. */ @@ -375,15 +347,11 @@ public: * set_fill_level() for a general description of the fill * level concept. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param restrict_to_fill_level Whether the fill level restricts slider movement. */ void set_restrict_to_fill_level(bool restrict_to_fill_level = true); /** Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * @return true if @a range is restricted to the fill level. */ @@ -407,15 +375,11 @@ public: * by set_restrict_to_fill_level() and is by default * enabled. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param fill_level The new position of the fill level indicator. */ void set_fill_level(double fill_level); /** Gets the current position of the fill level indicator. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * @return The current fill level. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/rc.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/rc.h index 730b3e91fc..ce6522638e 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/rc.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/rc.h @@ -281,8 +281,6 @@ public: * with Gtk::Widget::set_style(). * * @param settings a Gtk::Settings - * - * @newin{2,4} */ static void reset_styles(const Glib::RefPtr& settings); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentaction.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentaction.h index 6e9fd03b36..c4912e44a8 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentaction.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentaction.h @@ -58,8 +58,6 @@ namespace Gtk * * See also the methods in the RecentChooser base class. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @ingroup RecentFiles */ @@ -145,8 +143,6 @@ public: /** Returns the value set by Gtk::RecentChooserMenu::set_show_numbers(). - * - * @newin{2,12} * * @return true if numbers should be shown. */ @@ -157,8 +153,6 @@ public: * a unique character for a mnemonic to be used inside the menu item's * label. Only the first ten items get a number to avoid clashes. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param show_numbers true if the shown items should be numbered. */ void set_show_numbers(bool show_numbers = true); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooser.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooser.h index 9582322b61..6bdbc4c454 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooser.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooser.h @@ -141,8 +141,6 @@ namespace Gtk * that implement this interface are RecentChooserWidget, RecentChooserDialog * and RecentChooserMenu. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @ingroup RecentFiles */ @@ -215,8 +213,6 @@ public: /** Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param show_private true to show private items, false otherwise. */ @@ -225,8 +221,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether @a chooser should display recently used resources * registered as private. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the recent chooser should show private items, * false otherwise. */ @@ -235,8 +229,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether @a chooser should display the recently used resources that * it didn't find. This only applies to local resources. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param show_not_found Whether to show the local items we didn't find. */ void set_show_not_found(bool show_not_found = true); @@ -244,24 +236,18 @@ public: /** Retrieves whether @a chooser should show the recently used resources that * were not found. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the resources not found should be displayed, and * false otheriwse. */ bool get_show_not_found() const; /** Sets whether @a chooser can select multiple items. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param select_multiple true if @a chooser can select more than one item. */ void set_select_multiple(bool select_multiple = true); /** Gets whether @a chooser can select multiple items. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return true if @a chooser can select more than one item. */ @@ -270,8 +256,6 @@ public: /** Sets the number of items that should be returned by * get_items() and get_uris(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param limit A positive integer, or -1 for all items. */ void set_limit(int limit); @@ -280,8 +264,6 @@ public: /** Gets the number of items returned by get_items() * and get_uris(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are * returned. */ @@ -292,8 +274,6 @@ public: * @a local_only is true (the default) then the shown resources are guaranteed * to be accessible through the operating system native file system. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param local_only true if only local files can be shown. */ void set_local_only(bool local_only = true); @@ -301,8 +281,6 @@ public: /** Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used * resources selector. See set_local_only() * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if only local resources should be shown. */ bool get_local_only() const; @@ -310,8 +288,6 @@ public: /** Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each * recently used resource in a Gtk::RecentChooser widget. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param show_tips true if tooltips should be shown. */ void set_show_tips(bool show_tips = true); @@ -319,8 +295,6 @@ public: /** Gets whether @a chooser should display tooltips containing the full path * of a recently user resource. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the recent chooser should show tooltips, * false otherwise. */ @@ -332,15 +306,11 @@ public: /** Sets whether @a chooser should show an icon near the resource when * displaying it. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param show_icons Whether to show an icon near the resource. */ void set_show_icons(bool show_icons = true); /** Retrieves whether @a chooser should show an icon near the resource. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return true if the icons should be displayed, false otherwise. */ @@ -349,15 +319,11 @@ public: /** Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by * @a chooser. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param sort_type Sort order that the chooser should use. */ void set_sort_type(RecentSortType sort_type); /** Gets the value set by set_sort_type(). - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The sorting order of the @a chooser. */ @@ -380,8 +346,6 @@ public: // throwing RecentChooserError instead /** Sets @a uri as the current URI for @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param uri A URI. * @return true if the URI was found. @@ -389,16 +353,12 @@ public: bool set_current_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri); /** Gets the URI currently selected by @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A newly allocated string holding a URI. */ Glib::ustring get_current_uri() const; /** Gets the Gtk::RecentInfo currently selected by @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A Gtk::RecentInfo. Use Gtk::RecentInfo::unref() when * when you have finished using it. @@ -406,8 +366,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_current_item(); /** Gets the Gtk::RecentInfo currently selected by @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A Gtk::RecentInfo. Use Gtk::RecentInfo::unref() when * when you have finished using it. @@ -416,8 +374,6 @@ public: // TODO: Same here /** Selects @a uri inside @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param uri A URI. * @return true if @a uri was found. @@ -425,8 +381,6 @@ public: bool select_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri); /** Unselects @a uri inside @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param uri A URI. */ @@ -434,14 +388,10 @@ public: /** Selects all the items inside @a chooser, if the @a chooser supports * multiple selection. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void select_all(); /** Unselects all the items inside @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void unselect_all(); @@ -453,8 +403,6 @@ public: * The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and * "limit" properties of @a chooser. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A newly allocated * list of Gtk::RecentInfo objects. You should * use Gtk::RecentInfo::unref() on every item of the list, and then free @@ -475,23 +423,17 @@ public: * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call * set_filter(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param filter A Gtk::RecentFilter. */ void add_filter(const RecentFilter& filter); /** Removes @a filter from the list of Gtk::RecentFilter objects held by @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param filter A Gtk::RecentFilter. */ void remove_filter(const RecentFilter& filter); /** Gets the Gtk::RecentFilter objects held by @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A singly linked list * of Gtk::RecentFilter objects. You @@ -500,8 +442,6 @@ public: Glib::SListHandle list_filters(); /** Gets the Gtk::RecentFilter objects held by @a chooser. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A singly linked list * of Gtk::RecentFilter objects. You @@ -512,8 +452,6 @@ public: /** Sets @a filter as the current Gtk::RecentFilter object used by @a chooser * to affect the displayed recently used resources. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param filter A Gtk::RecentFilter. */ void set_filter(const RecentFilter& filter); @@ -521,8 +459,6 @@ public: /** Gets the Gtk::RecentFilter object currently used by @a chooser to affect * the display of the recently used resources. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A Gtk::RecentFilter object. */ RecentFilter* get_filter(); @@ -530,8 +466,6 @@ public: /** Gets the Gtk::RecentFilter object currently used by @a chooser to affect * the display of the recently used resources. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A Gtk::RecentFilter object. */ const RecentFilter* get_filter() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserdialog.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserdialog.h index fcc45ace81..abd56dd8e3 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserdialog.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserdialog.h @@ -53,8 +53,6 @@ namespace Gtk * A RecentChooserDialog looks like this: * @image html recentchooserdialog1.png * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @ingroup RecentFiles */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchoosermenu.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchoosermenu.h index 22ee631975..c40fec283b 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchoosermenu.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchoosermenu.h @@ -50,8 +50,6 @@ namespace Gtk * Note that RecentChooserMenu does not have any methods of its own. Instead, * you should use the functions that work on a RecentChooser. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @ingroup RecentFiles */ @@ -123,15 +121,11 @@ public: * be used inside ten menu item's label. Only the first the items * get a number to avoid clashes. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param show_numbers Whether to show numbers. */ void set_show_numbers(bool show_numbers = true); /** Returns the value set by set_show_numbers(). - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return true if numbers should be shown. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserwidget.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserwidget.h index 6e1019eaf9..9bf2950be8 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserwidget.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserwidget.h @@ -47,8 +47,6 @@ namespace Gtk * Note that RecentChooserWidget does not have any methods of its own. * Instead, you should use the functions that work on a RecentChooser. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @ingroup RecentFiles */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentfilter.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentfilter.h index 3fc865eaed..50121662dc 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentfilter.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentfilter.h @@ -128,8 +128,6 @@ namespace Gtk * see RecentChooser::add_filter(), but it is also possible to * manually use a filter on a file with filter(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @ingroup RecentFiles */ @@ -195,8 +193,6 @@ public: * that will be displayed in the recently used resources selector * user interface if there is a selectable list of filters. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param name Then human readable name of @a filter. */ void set_name(const Glib::ustring& name); @@ -204,8 +200,6 @@ public: /** Gets the human-readable name for the filter. * See set_name(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The name of the filter, or 0. The returned string * is owned by the filter object and should not be freed. */ @@ -213,8 +207,6 @@ public: /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on their registered MIME type. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param mime_type A MIME type. */ @@ -223,24 +215,18 @@ public: /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on a pattern matching their * display name. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param pattern A file pattern. */ void add_pattern(const Glib::ustring& pattern); /** Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported * by GdkPixbuf. - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void add_pixbuf_formats(); /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on the name of the application * that has registered them. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param application An application name. */ void add_application(const Glib::ustring& application); @@ -248,8 +234,6 @@ public: /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on the name of the group * to which they belong * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param group A group name. */ void add_group(const Glib::ustring& group); @@ -257,8 +241,6 @@ public: /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on their age - that is, the number * of days elapsed since they were last modified. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param days Number of days. */ void add_age(int days); @@ -303,8 +285,6 @@ public: * is intended principally for use in the implementation of * Gtk::RecentChooser. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return Bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when * calling filter(). */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentinfo.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentinfo.h index 475b2b48e0..370254e16d 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentinfo.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentinfo.h @@ -42,8 +42,6 @@ namespace Gtk /** Contains informations found when looking up an entry of the * recently used files list. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @ingroup RecentFiles */ class RecentInfo @@ -98,8 +96,6 @@ public: /** Gets the URI of the resource. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The URI of the resource. The returned string is * owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed. @@ -109,16 +105,12 @@ public: /** Gets the name of the resource. If none has been defined, the basename * of the resource is obtained. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The display name of the resource. The returned string * is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed. */ Glib::ustring get_display_name() const; /** Gets the (short) description of the resource. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The description of the resource. The returned string * is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed. @@ -126,8 +118,6 @@ public: Glib::ustring get_description() const; /** Gets the MIME type of the resource. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The MIME type of the resource. The returned string * is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed. @@ -138,8 +128,6 @@ public: /** Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource * was added to the recently used resources list. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when * the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure. */ @@ -148,8 +136,6 @@ public: /** Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource * was last modified. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when * the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure. */ @@ -158,8 +144,6 @@ public: /** Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource * was last visited. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when * the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure. */ @@ -170,8 +154,6 @@ public: * list that have this flag set to true should only be displayed by the * applications that have registered them. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the private flag was found, false otherwise. */ bool get_private_hint() const; @@ -183,8 +165,6 @@ public: * If the command line contains any escape characters defined inside the * storage specification, they will be expanded. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param app_name The name of the application that has registered this item. * @param app_exec Return location for the string containing the command line. * @param count Return location for the number of times this item was registered. @@ -201,8 +181,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the list of applications that have registered this resource. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param length Return location for the length of the returned list. * @return A newly allocated 0-terminated array of strings. @@ -215,15 +193,11 @@ public: /** Gets the name of the last application that have registered the * recently used resource represented by @a info. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return An application name. Use Glib::free() to free it. */ Glib::ustring last_application() const; /** Checks whether an application registered this resource using @a app_name. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param app_name A string containing an application name. * @return true if an application with name @a app_name was found, @@ -236,8 +210,6 @@ public: * array of returned group names will be 0 terminated, so length might * optionally be 0. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param length Return location for the number of groups returned. * @return A newly allocated 0 terminated array of strings. * Use Glib::strfreev() to free it. @@ -249,8 +221,6 @@ public: /** Checks whether @a group_name appears inside the groups registered for the * recently used item @a info. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param group_name Name of a group. * @return true if the group was found. */ @@ -258,8 +228,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the icon of size @a size associated to the resource MIME type. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param size The size of the icon in pixels. * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf containing the icon, @@ -268,8 +236,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_icon(int size); /** Retrieves the icon of size @a size associated to the resource MIME type. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param size The size of the icon in pixels. * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf containing the icon, @@ -282,8 +248,6 @@ public: * menu or list. For example, calling this function on an item that refers to * "file:///foo/bar.txt" will yield "bar.txt". * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A newly-allocated string in UTF-8 encoding; free it with * Glib::free(). */ @@ -293,8 +257,6 @@ public: * is local, it returns a local path; if the resource is not local, * it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of get_uri(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the * resource's URI or 0. Use Glib::free() when done using it. */ @@ -304,8 +266,6 @@ public: /** Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource * pointed by @a info. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A positive integer containing the number of days elapsed * since the time this resource was last modified. */ @@ -314,8 +274,6 @@ public: /** Checks whether the resource is local or not by looking at the * scheme of its URI. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the resource is local. */ bool is_local() const; @@ -323,8 +281,6 @@ public: /** Checks whether the resource pointed by @a info still exists. At * the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the resource exists. */ bool exists() const; @@ -333,8 +289,6 @@ public: /** Checks whether two Gtk::RecentInfo structures point to the same * resource. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param info_b A Gtk::RecentInfo. * @return true if both Gtk::RecentInfo structures point to se same * resource, false otherwise. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentmanager.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentmanager.h index cecb2209da..568e46028a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentmanager.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentmanager.h @@ -124,8 +124,6 @@ namespace Gtk * get_for_screen() and it will contain information about current * recent manager for that screen. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @ingroup RecentFiles */ @@ -191,8 +189,6 @@ public: * in your application without caring about memory management. The * returned instance will be freed when you application terminates. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return A unique Gtk::RecentManager. Do not ref or unref it. */ static Glib::RefPtr get_default(); @@ -212,8 +208,6 @@ public: * not be used in newly written code. Calling this function is * equivalent to calling get_default(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen. * @return A unique Gtk::RecentManager associated with the given * screen. This recent manager is associated to the with the screen @@ -260,8 +254,6 @@ public: * track the user's currently configured recently used documents * storage. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * Deprecated: 2.12: This function has been deprecated and should * not be used in newly written code. Calling this function has * no effect. @@ -288,8 +280,6 @@ public: /** Removes a resource pointed by @a uri from the recently used resources * list handled by a recent manager. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param uri The URI of the item you wish to remove. * @return true if the item pointed by @a uri has been successfully * removed by the recently used resources list, and false otherwise. @@ -300,8 +290,6 @@ public: * returns a structure containing informations about the resource * like its MIME type, or its display name. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param uri A URI. * @return A Gtk::RecentInfo structure containing information * about the resource pointed by @a uri, or 0 if the URI was @@ -314,8 +302,6 @@ public: * returns a structure containing informations about the resource * like its MIME type, or its display name. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param uri A URI. * @return A Gtk::RecentInfo structure containing information * about the resource pointed by @a uri, or 0 if the URI was @@ -327,8 +313,6 @@ public: /** Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered * with @a uri inside the recent manager. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param uri A URI. * @return true if the resource was found, false otherwise. */ @@ -339,8 +323,6 @@ public: * Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed * by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param uri The URI of a recently used resource. * @param new_uri The new URI of the recently used resource, or 0 to * remove the item pointed by @a uri in the list. @@ -352,8 +334,6 @@ public: * function should return. If @a limit is set to -1, then return all the * items. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * Deprecated: 2.22: The length of the list should be managed by the * view (implementing Gtk::RecentChooser), and not by the model (the * Gtk::RecentManager). See Gtk::RecentChooser::property_limit(). @@ -365,8 +345,6 @@ public: /** Gets the maximum number of items that the get_items() * function should return. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * Deprecated: 2.22: The length of the list should be managed by the * view (implementing Gtk::RecentChooser), and not by the model (the * Gtk::RecentManager). See Gtk::RecentChooser::property_limit(). @@ -379,8 +357,6 @@ public: /** Gets the list of recently used resources. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A list of * newly allocated Gtk::RecentInfo objects. Use @@ -391,8 +367,6 @@ public: /** Purges every item from the recently used resources list. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return The number of items that have been removed from the * recently used resources list. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scale.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scale.h index 6f3ee6e1a1..4d6549515b 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scale.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scale.h @@ -172,8 +172,6 @@ public: * object is owned by the scale so does not need to be freed by * the caller. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The Pango::Layout for this scale, * or 0 if the Gtk::Scale::property_draw_value() property is false. */ @@ -183,8 +181,6 @@ public: * object is owned by the scale so does not need to be freed by * the caller. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The Pango::Layout for this scale, * or 0 if the Gtk::Scale::property_draw_value() property is false. */ @@ -198,8 +194,6 @@ public: * If the Gtk::Scale::property_draw_value() property is false, the return * values are undefined. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param x Location to store X offset of layout, or 0. * @param y Location to store Y offset of layout, or 0. */ @@ -216,8 +210,6 @@ public: * * To remove marks from a scale, use clear_marks(). * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param value The value at which the mark is placed, must be between * the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment. * @param position Where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, Gtk::POS_TOP @@ -229,8 +221,6 @@ public: void add_mark(double value, PositionType position, const Glib::ustring& markup); /** Removes any marks that have been added with add_mark(). - * - * @newin{2,16} */ void clear_marks(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scalebutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scalebutton.h index b449f40461..a356316fb6 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scalebutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scalebutton.h @@ -53,7 +53,6 @@ namespace Gtk * for this use case. * * @ingroup Widgets - * @newin{2,12} */ class ScaleButton : public Button @@ -120,15 +119,11 @@ public: /** Sets the icons to be used by the scale button. * For details, see the Gtk::ScaleButton::property_icons() property. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param icons A 0-terminated array of icon names. */ void set_icons(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& icons); /** Gets the current value of the scale button. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * @return Current value of the scale button. */ @@ -139,8 +134,6 @@ public: * inside them. The scale button emits the Gtk::ScaleButton::signal_value_changed() * signal if the value changes. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param value New value of the scale button. */ void set_value(double value); @@ -151,8 +144,6 @@ public: /** Gets the Gtk::Adjustment associated with the Gtk::ScaleButton's scale. * See Gtk::Range::get_adjustment() for details. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The adjustment associated with the scale. */ Gtk::Adjustment* get_adjustment(); @@ -166,8 +157,6 @@ public: /** Gets the Gtk::Adjustment associated with the Gtk::ScaleButton's scale. * See Gtk::Range::get_adjustment() for details. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The adjustment associated with the scale. */ Gtk::Adjustment* get_adjustment() const; @@ -178,8 +167,6 @@ public: * for the Gtk::ScaleButton's scale. * See Gtk::Range::set_adjustment() for details. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param adjustment A Gtk::Adjustment. */ void set_adjustment(Gtk::Adjustment& adjustment); @@ -187,8 +174,6 @@ public: // TODO: Should be deprecated, but we have no replacement yet, until we break ABI. /** Gets the orientation of the Gtk::ScaleButton's popup window. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Orientable::get_orientation() instead. * @@ -197,8 +182,6 @@ public: Orientation get_orientation(); /** Sets the orientation of the Gtk::ScaleButton's popup window. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Orientable::set_orientation() instead. * @@ -208,48 +191,36 @@ public: /** Retrieves the plus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The plus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton. */ Widget* get_plus_button(); /** Retrieves the plus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The plus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton. */ const Widget* get_plus_button() const; /** Retrieves the minus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The minus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton. */ Widget* get_minus_button(); /** Retrieves the minus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The minus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton. */ const Widget* get_minus_button() const; /** Retrieves the popup of the Gtk::ScaleButton. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The popup of the Gtk::ScaleButton. */ Gtk::Widget* get_popup(); /** Retrieves the popup of the Gtk::ScaleButton. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The popup of the Gtk::ScaleButton. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scrolledwindow.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scrolledwindow.h index a9851d70a8..b997ca7259 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scrolledwindow.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scrolledwindow.h @@ -226,8 +226,6 @@ public: * * See also set_placement() and * get_placement(). - * - * @newin{2,10} */ void unset_placement(); @@ -261,8 +259,6 @@ public: /** Returns the vertical scrollbar of @a scrolled_window. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return The vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window, * or 0 if it does not have one. @@ -270,8 +266,6 @@ public: VScrollbar* get_vscrollbar(); /** Returns the vertical scrollbar of @a scrolled_window. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return The vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window, * or 0 if it does not have one. @@ -280,8 +274,6 @@ public: /** Returns the horizontal scrollbar of @a scrolled_window. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return The horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window, * or 0 if it does not have one. @@ -289,8 +281,6 @@ public: HScrollbar* get_hscrollbar(); /** Returns the horizontal scrollbar of @a scrolled_window. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return The horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window, * or 0 if it does not have one. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/selectiondata.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/selectiondata.h index 5e5e39d904..d8aa9a31fe 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/selectiondata.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/selectiondata.h @@ -126,8 +126,6 @@ public: * The pixbuf is converted to the form determined by * @a selection_data->target. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf. * @return true if the selection was successfully set, * otherwise false. @@ -135,8 +133,6 @@ public: bool set_pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr& pixbuf); /** Gets the contents of the selection data as a Gdk::Pixbuf. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return If the selection data contained a recognized * image type and it could be converted to a Gdk::Pixbuf, a @@ -146,8 +142,6 @@ public: Glib::RefPtr get_pixbuf(); /** Gets the contents of the selection data as a Gdk::Pixbuf. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return If the selection data contained a recognized * image type and it could be converted to a Gdk::Pixbuf, a @@ -163,8 +157,6 @@ public: * The string is converted to the form determined by * @a selection_data->target. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param uris A 0-terminated array of strings holding URIs. * @return true if the selection was successfully set, * otherwise false. @@ -175,23 +167,17 @@ public: * * @return If the selection data contains a list of * URIs, a container containing the URIs, otherwise an empty container. - * - * @newin{2,6}. */ Glib::StringArrayHandle get_uris() const; /** Retrieves the raw data of the selection. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The raw data of the selection. */ const guchar* get_data() const; /** Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The length of the data of the selection. */ @@ -202,16 +188,12 @@ public: //TODO: Change the return type to std::string, when we can break ABI: /** Retrieves the selection Gdk::Atom of the selection data. - * - * @newin{2,16} * * @return The selection Gdk::Atom of the selection data. */ GdkAtom get_selection() const; /** Retrieves the target of the selection. - * - * @newin{2,14} **/ std::string get_target() const; @@ -226,8 +208,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the format of the selection. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The format of the selection. */ @@ -235,16 +215,12 @@ public: /** Retrieves the display of the selection. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The display of the selection. */ Glib::RefPtr get_display(); /** Retrieves the display of the selection. - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return The display of the selection. */ @@ -255,8 +231,6 @@ public: * determines if any of the targets in @a targets can be used to * provide a list or URIs. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if @a selection_data holds a list of targets, * and a suitable target for URI lists is included, otherwise false. */ @@ -275,8 +249,6 @@ public: * determines if any of the targets in @a targets can be used to * provide rich text. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param buffer A Gtk::TextBuffer. * @return true if @a selection_data holds a list of targets, * and a suitable target for rich text is included, @@ -288,8 +260,6 @@ public: * determines if any of the targets in @a targets can be used to * provide a Gdk::Pixbuf. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param writable Whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows * how to convert a pixbuf into the format. * @return true if @a selection_data holds a list of targets, diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/separatortoolitem.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/separatortoolitem.h index eb89e2d453..55d8c9e30e 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/separatortoolitem.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/separatortoolitem.h @@ -114,8 +114,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether @a item is drawn as a line, or just blank. * See set_draw(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if @a item is drawn as a line, or just blank. */ bool get_draw() const; @@ -124,8 +122,6 @@ public: * Setting this to false along with Gtk::ToolItem::set_expand() is useful * to create an item that forces following items to the end of the toolbar. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param draw Whether @a item is drawn as a vertical line. */ void set_draw(bool draw = true); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/settings.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/settings.h index d982dc2c7c..f393b091c8 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/settings.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/settings.h @@ -116,8 +116,6 @@ public: /** Gets the Gtk::Settings object for @a screen, creating it if necessary. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen. * @return A Gtk::Settings object. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/sizegroup.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/sizegroup.h index 9c140e3a3f..9eaeb2ec2d 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/sizegroup.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/sizegroup.h @@ -180,16 +180,12 @@ public: /** Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when * calculating the size. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param ignore_hidden Whether unmapped widgets should be ignored * when calculating the size. */ void set_ignore_hidden(bool ignore_hidden = true); /** Returns if invisible widgets are ignored when calculating the size. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return true if invisible widgets are ignored. */ @@ -217,8 +213,6 @@ public: /** Returns the list of widgets associated with @a size_group. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A SList of * widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified. @@ -226,8 +220,6 @@ public: Glib::SListHandle get_widgets(); /** Returns the list of widgets associated with @a size_group. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A SList of * widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/socket.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/socket.h index 822fb971dc..c72cbdda9f 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/socket.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/socket.h @@ -187,8 +187,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the window of the plug. Use this to check if the plug has * been created inside of the socket. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The window of the plug if available, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_plug_window(); @@ -196,8 +194,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the window of the plug. Use this to check if the plug has * been created inside of the socket. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The window of the plug if available, or 0. */ Glib::RefPtr get_plug_window() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/spinner.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/spinner.h index 546097fa01..24d2a0ffd2 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/spinner.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/spinner.h @@ -43,7 +43,6 @@ namespace Gtk /** A widget that displays a spinner animation. * - * @newin{2,20} * @ingroup Widgets */ @@ -107,14 +106,10 @@ public: /** Starts the animation of the spinner. - * - * @newin{2,20} */ void start(); /** Stops the animation of the spinner. - * - * @newin{2,20} */ void stop(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/statusbar.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/statusbar.h index 82517c9614..e2e9e0ec3d 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/statusbar.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/statusbar.h @@ -161,8 +161,6 @@ public: /** Forces the removal of all messages from a statusbar's * stack with the exact @a context_id. * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param context_id A context identifier. */ void remove_all_messages(guint context_id = 0); @@ -185,16 +183,12 @@ public: //I'm not generally happy about API that returns an unknown type. murrayc. /** Retrieves the box containing the label widget. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return A Gtk::Box. */ Gtk::Widget* get_message_area(); /** Retrieves the box containing the label widget. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return A Gtk::Box. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/style.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/style.h index 58cad2f7e3..cdad2a99cb 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/style.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/style.h @@ -647,8 +647,6 @@ public: * it depends on the Gtk::Style and might change when a theme * switch occurs. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param color_name The name of the logical color to look up. * @param color The Gdk::Color to fill in. * @return true if the mapping was found. @@ -677,8 +675,6 @@ public: /** Queries the value of a style property corresponding to a * widget class is in the given style. * - * @newin{2,16} - * * @param widget_type The Type of a descendant of Gtk::Widget. * @param property_name The name of the style property to get. * @param value A Value where the value of the property being @@ -692,8 +688,6 @@ public: * @param widget_type the GType of a descendant of GtkWidget. * @param property_name The name of the style property to get. * @param value: An output parameter in which the value of the property being queried will be stored. - * - * @newin{2,16} */ template void get_style_property(GType widget_type, const Glib::ustring& property_name, PropertyType& value) const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/table.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/table.h index 0d64b9a5bb..8dc03c29e7 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/table.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/table.h @@ -306,8 +306,6 @@ public: /** Returns the number of rows and columns in the table. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @param rows Return location for the number of * rows, or 0. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textbuffer.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textbuffer.h index 5f3df3a0ba..921cb2f902 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textbuffer.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textbuffer.h @@ -428,8 +428,6 @@ public: * @param interactive Whether the deletion is caused by user interaction. * @param default_editable Whether the buffer is editable by default. * @result An iterator to the location where text was deleted, if the buffer was modified. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ iterator backspace(const iterator& iter, bool interactive = true, bool default_editable = true); @@ -534,8 +532,6 @@ public: * Emits the "mark-set" signal as notification of the mark's initial * placement. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param mark The mark to add. * @param where Location to place mark. */ @@ -783,8 +779,6 @@ public: /** Indicates whether the buffer has some text currently selected. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return true if the there is text selected. */ @@ -857,8 +851,6 @@ public: * to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can * be optimized. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param ins Where to put the "insert" mark. * @param bound Where to put the "selection_bound" mark. */ @@ -898,8 +890,6 @@ public: * using Gtk::TargetList::add_rich_text_targets() and * Gtk::TargetList::add_text_targets(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The Gtk::TargetList. */ Glib::RefPtr get_copy_target_list() const; @@ -910,8 +900,6 @@ public: * using Gtk::TargetList::add_rich_text_targets() and * Gtk::TargetList::add_text_targets(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The Gtk::TargetList. */ Glib::RefPtr get_paste_target_list() const; @@ -948,8 +936,6 @@ public: * identifier != 0 here, since the 0 tagset requires the * receiving buffer to deal with with pasting of arbitrary tags. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param tagset_name An optional tagset name, on 0. * @return The Gdk::Atom that corresponds to the * newly registered format's mime-type. @@ -965,8 +951,6 @@ public: * format with the passed @a buffer. See * register_serialize_tagset() for details. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param tagset_name An optional tagset name, on 0. * @return The Gdk::Atom that corresponds to the * newly registered format's mime-type. @@ -978,8 +962,6 @@ public: * registered using register_serialize_format() or * register_serialize_tagset() * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param format A Gdk::Atom representing a registered rich text format. */ void unregister_serialize_format(const Glib::ustring& format); @@ -988,8 +970,6 @@ public: * registered using register_deserialize_format() or * register_deserialize_tagset(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param format A Gdk::Atom representing a registered rich text format. */ void unregister_deserialize_format(const Glib::ustring& format); @@ -1013,8 +993,6 @@ public: * tags from these buffers, because you know that your application can * handle the newly created tags. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param format A Gdk::Atom representing a registered rich text format. * @param can_create_tags Whether deserializing this format may create tags. */ @@ -1023,8 +1001,6 @@ public: /** This functions returns the value set with * deserialize_set_can_create_tags() * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param format A Gdk::Atom representing a registered rich text format. * @return Whether deserializing this format may create tags. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textiter.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textiter.h index 91b9034160..332a7bb1d2 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textiter.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textiter.h @@ -755,8 +755,6 @@ public: * the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if @a iter was * already at the end of the buffer. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return Whether @a iter can be dereferenced. */ bool forward_visible_line(); @@ -769,8 +767,6 @@ public: * in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on * every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.) * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return Whether @a iter moved. */ bool backward_visible_line(); @@ -783,8 +779,6 @@ public: * the function does nothing and returns false. If @a count is negative, * moves backward by 0 - @a count lines. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param count Number of lines to move forward. * @return Whether @a iter moved and is dereferenceable. */ @@ -798,8 +792,6 @@ public: * the function does nothing and returns false. If @a count is negative, * moves forward by 0 - @a count lines. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param count Number of lines to move backward. * @return Whether @a iter moved and is dereferenceable. */ @@ -815,8 +807,6 @@ public: * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break * algorithms). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if @a iter moved and is not the end iterator. */ bool forward_visible_word_end(); @@ -827,15 +817,11 @@ public: * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break * algorithms). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if @a iter moved and is not the end iterator. */ bool backward_visible_word_start(); /** Calls forward_visible_word_end() up to @a count times. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param count Number of times to move. * @return true if @a iter moved and is not the end iterator. @@ -843,8 +829,6 @@ public: bool forward_visible_word_ends(int count); /** Calls backward_visible_word_start() up to @a count times. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param count Number of times to move. * @return true if @a iter moved and is not the end iterator. @@ -932,8 +916,6 @@ public: /** Moves @a iter forward to the next visible cursor position. See * forward_cursor_position() for details. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable. */ bool forward_visible_cursor_position(); @@ -941,8 +923,6 @@ public: /** Moves @a iter forward to the previous visible cursor position. See * backward_cursor_position() for details. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable. */ bool backward_visible_cursor_position(); @@ -950,8 +930,6 @@ public: /** Moves up to @a count visible cursor positions. See * forward_cursor_position() for details. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param count Number of positions to move. * @return true if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable. */ @@ -960,8 +938,6 @@ public: /** Moves up to @a count visible cursor positions. See * backward_cursor_position() for details. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param count Number of positions to move. * @return true if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textmark.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textmark.h index 67bd7281f9..071ab363e0 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textmark.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textmark.h @@ -139,7 +139,6 @@ protected: * @param name mark name. * @param left_gravity Whether the mark should have left gravity. - * @newin{2,12} */ explicit TextMark(bool left_gravity = true); @@ -154,7 +153,6 @@ protected: * @param name mark name. * @param left_gravity Whether the mark should have left gravity. - * @newin{2,12} */ explicit TextMark(const Glib::ustring& name, bool left_gravity = true); @@ -173,7 +171,6 @@ public: * @param name mark name. * @param left_gravity Whether the mark should have left gravity. * @result A RefPtr to a new text mark. - * @newin{2,12} */ static Glib::RefPtr create(bool left_gravity = true); @@ -191,7 +188,6 @@ public: * @param name mark name. * @param left_gravity Whether the mark should have left gravity. * @result A RefPtr to a new text mark. - * @newin{2,12} */ static Glib::RefPtr create(const Glib::ustring& name, bool left_gravity = true); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textview.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textview.h index 00c6b2b59d..da46de720f 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textview.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/textview.h @@ -338,8 +338,6 @@ public: * which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions between * characters. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param iter A Gtk::TextIter. * @param trailing If non-0, location to store an integer indicating where * in the grapheme the user clicked. It will either be @@ -404,32 +402,24 @@ public: /** Gets the horizontal-scrolling Gtk::Adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return Pointer to the horizontal Gtk::Adjustment. */ Gtk::Adjustment* get_hadjustment(); /** Gets the horizontal-scrolling Gtk::Adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return Pointer to the horizontal Gtk::Adjustment. */ const Gtk::Adjustment* get_hadjustment() const; /** Gets the vertical-scrolling Gtk::Adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return Pointer to the vertical Gtk::Adjustment. */ Gtk::Adjustment* get_vadjustment(); /** Gets the vertical-scrolling Gtk::Adjustment. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return Pointer to the vertical Gtk::Adjustment. */ @@ -591,8 +581,6 @@ public: * * [C example ellipted] * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param event The key event. * @return true if the input method handled the key event. */ @@ -602,8 +590,6 @@ public: * * This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer * would confuse on-going input method behavior. - * - * @newin{2,22} */ void reset_im_context(); @@ -802,16 +788,12 @@ public: /** Changes the Gtk::TextView overwrite mode. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param overwrite true to turn on overwrite mode, false to turn it off. */ void set_overwrite(bool overwrite = true); /** Returns whether the Gtk::TextView is in overwrite mode or not. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Whether @a text_view is in overwrite mode or not. */ @@ -823,8 +805,6 @@ public: * is false the keyboard focus is moved to the next widget in the focus * chain. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param accepts_tab true if pressing the Tab key should insert a tab * character, false, if pressing the Tab key should move the * keyboard focus. @@ -834,8 +814,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters. * set_accepts_tab(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character, * false if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggleaction.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggleaction.h index 3e860103c1..8d4d70c256 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggleaction.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggleaction.h @@ -179,30 +179,22 @@ public: /** Emits the "toggled" signal on the toggle action. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void toggled(); /** Sets the checked state on the toggle action. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param is_active Whether the action should be checked or not. */ void set_active(bool is_active = true); /** Returns the checked state of the toggle action. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The checked state of the toggle action. */ bool get_active() const; /** Sets whether the action should have proxies like a radio action. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param draw_as_radio Whether the action should have proxies like a radio * action. @@ -210,8 +202,6 @@ public: void set_draw_as_radio(bool draw_as_radio = true); /** Returns whether the action should have proxies like a radio action. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return Whether the action should have proxies like a radio action. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggletoolbutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggletoolbutton.h index 6107563b9d..af30498a47 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggletoolbutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toggletoolbutton.h @@ -145,8 +145,6 @@ public: * want the GtkToggleButton to be 'pressed in', and false to raise it. * This action causes the toggled signal to be emitted. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param is_active Whether @a button should be active. */ void set_active(bool is_active = true); @@ -154,8 +152,6 @@ public: /** Queries a Gtk::ToggleToolButton and returns its current state. * Returns true if the toggle button is pressed in and false if it is raised. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the toggle tool button is pressed in, false if not. */ bool get_active() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbar.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbar.h index 05708ef8d1..50f88b4dbd 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbar.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbar.h @@ -124,8 +124,6 @@ public: * 0 the item is prepended to the start of the toolbar. If @a pos is * negative, the item is appended to the end of the toolbar. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param item A Gtk::ToolItem. * @param pos The position of the new item. */ @@ -145,16 +143,12 @@ public: /** Returns the position of @a item on the toolbar, starting from 0. * It is an error if @a item is not a child of the toolbar. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param item A Gtk::ToolItem that is a child of @a toolbar. * @return The position of item on the toolbar. */ int get_item_index(const ToolItem& item) const; /** Returns the number of items on the toolbar. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The number of items on the toolbar. */ @@ -163,8 +157,6 @@ public: /** Returns the @a n'th item on @a toolbar, or 0 if the * toolbar does not contain an @a n'th item. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param n A position on the toolbar. * @return The @a n'th Gtk::ToolItem on @a toolbar, * or 0 if there isn't an @a n'th item. @@ -174,8 +166,6 @@ public: /** Returns the @a n'th item on @a toolbar, or 0 if the * toolbar does not contain an @a n'th item. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param n A position on the toolbar. * @return The @a n'th Gtk::ToolItem on @a toolbar, * or 0 if there isn't an @a n'th item. @@ -185,8 +175,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the toolbar has an overflow menu. * See set_show_arrow(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the toolbar has an overflow menu. */ bool get_show_arrow() const; @@ -196,8 +184,6 @@ public: * items that there are not room are available through an * overflow menu. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param show_arrow Whether to show an overflow menu. */ void set_show_arrow(bool show_arrow = true); @@ -286,16 +272,12 @@ public: * application toolbars should respect the user preferences for the * size of icons. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param icon_size The Gtk::IconSize that stock icons in the toolbar shall have. */ void set_icon_size(IconSize icon_size); /** Unsets toolbar icon size set with set_icon_size(), so that * user preferences will be used to determine the icon size. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void unset_icon_size(); @@ -311,8 +293,6 @@ public: /** Returns the relief style of buttons on @a toolbar. See * Gtk::Button::set_relief(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The relief style of buttons on @a toolbar. */ ReliefStyle get_relief_style() const; @@ -324,8 +304,6 @@ public: * * @a x and @a y are in @a toolbar coordinates. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param x X coordinate of a point on the toolbar. * @param y Y coordinate of a point on the toolbar. * @return The position corresponding to the point ( @a x, @a y) on the toolbar. @@ -342,8 +320,6 @@ public: * added to any widget hierarchy or used as highlight item for another * toolbar. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param tool_item A Gtk::ToolItem, or 0 to turn of highlighting. * @param index A position on @a toolbar. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbutton.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbutton.h index 5e44891445..c45383475a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbutton.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolbutton.h @@ -142,8 +142,6 @@ public: * is determined by the "stock_id" property. If the "stock_id" property is also * 0, @a button will not have a label. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param label A string that will be used as label, or 0. */ void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label); @@ -152,8 +150,6 @@ public: * doesn't have a label. or uses a the label from a stock item. The returned * string is owned by GTK+, and must not be modified or freed. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The label, or 0. */ Glib::ustring get_label() const; @@ -167,8 +163,6 @@ public: * Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property * only affects the menu item on the overflow menu. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param use_underline Whether the button label has the form "_Open". */ void set_use_underline(bool use_underline = true); @@ -176,8 +170,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether underscores in the label property are used as mnemonics * on menu items on the overflow menu. See set_use_underline(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if underscores in the label property are used as * mnemonics on menu items on the overflow menu. */ @@ -187,8 +179,6 @@ public: * The stock_id property only has an effect if not * overridden by "label" and "icon_widget" properties. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param stock_id A name of a stock item, or 0. */ void set_stock_id(const Gtk::StockID& stock_id); @@ -196,8 +186,6 @@ public: /** Returns the name of the stock item. See set_stock_id(). * The returned string is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed or modifed. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The name of the stock item for @a button. */ Glib::ustring get_stock_id() const; @@ -208,8 +196,6 @@ public: * overridden by non-0 "label", "icon_widget" and "stock_id" * properties. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param icon_name The name of the themed icon. */ void set_icon_name(const Glib::ustring& icon_name); @@ -217,8 +203,6 @@ public: /** Returns the name of the themed icon for the tool button, * see set_icon_name(). * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @return The icon name or 0 if the tool button has * no themed icon. */ @@ -228,8 +212,6 @@ public: * 0 the icon is determined by the "stock_id" property. If the * "stock_id" property is also 0, @a button will not have an icon. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param icon_widget The widget used as icon, or 0. */ void set_icon_widget(Widget& icon_widget); @@ -237,8 +219,6 @@ public: /** Return the widget used as icon widget on @a button. * See set_icon_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The widget used as icon * on @a button, or 0. */ @@ -247,8 +227,6 @@ public: /** Return the widget used as icon widget on @a button. * See set_icon_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The widget used as icon * on @a button, or 0. */ @@ -260,8 +238,6 @@ public: * determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If * "stock_id" is also 0, @a button does not have a label. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param label_widget The widget used as label, or 0. */ void set_label_widget(Widget& label_widget); @@ -269,8 +245,6 @@ public: /** Returns the widget used as label on @a button. * See set_label_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The widget used as label * on @a button, or 0. */ @@ -279,8 +253,6 @@ public: /** Returns the widget used as label on @a button. * See set_label_widget(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The widget used as label * on @a button, or 0. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitem.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitem.h index 41409efbef..0117d11f4d 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitem.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitem.h @@ -117,8 +117,6 @@ public: * homogeneous items. The effect is that all homogeneous items will have * the same width as the widest of the items. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param homogeneous Whether @a tool_item is the same size as other homogeneous items. */ void set_homogeneous(bool homogeneous = true); @@ -126,8 +124,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether @a tool_item is the same size as other homogeneous * items. See set_homogeneous(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if the item is the same size as other homogeneous * items. */ @@ -139,8 +135,6 @@ public: * effect is that the item gets bigger when the toolbar gets bigger * and smaller when the toolbar gets smaller. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param expand Whether @a tool_item is allocated extra space. */ void set_expand(bool expand = true); @@ -148,8 +142,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether @a tool_item is allocated extra space. * See set_expand(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if @a tool_item is allocated extra space. */ bool get_expand() const; @@ -161,8 +153,6 @@ public: * text to be displayed as tooltip on the item and the private text * to be used. See Gtk::Tooltips::set_tip(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * Deprecated: 2.12: Use set_tooltip_text() instead. * * @deprecated Use set_tooltip_text() or set_tooltip_markup() instead @@ -178,8 +168,6 @@ public: /** Sets the text to be displayed as tooltip on the item. * See Gtk::Widget::set_tooltip_text(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param text Text to be used as tooltip for @a tool_item. */ void set_tooltip_text(const Glib::ustring& text); @@ -187,8 +175,6 @@ public: /** Sets the markup text to be displayed as tooltip on the item. * See Gtk::Widget::set_tooltip_markup(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param markup Markup text to be used as tooltip for @a tool_item. */ void set_tooltip_markup(const Glib::ustring& markup); @@ -199,8 +185,6 @@ public: * When @a tool_item has a drag window it will intercept all events, * even those that would otherwise be sent to a child of @a tool_item. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param use_drag_window Whether @a tool_item has a drag window. */ void set_use_drag_window(bool use_drag_window = true); @@ -208,16 +192,12 @@ public: /** Returns whether @a tool_item has a drag window. See * set_use_drag_window(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if @a tool_item uses a drag window. */ bool get_use_drag_window() const; /** Sets whether @a tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param visible_horizontal Whether @a tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode. */ @@ -226,8 +206,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the @a tool_item is visible on toolbars that are * docked horizontally. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if @a tool_item is visible on toolbars that are * docked horizontally. */ @@ -239,8 +217,6 @@ public: * useful on a vertically docked toolbar. If @a visible_vertical is false * @a tool_item will not appear on toolbars that are docked vertically. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param visible_vertical Whether @a tool_item is visible when the toolbar * is in vertical mode. */ @@ -249,8 +225,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether @a tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically. * See set_visible_vertical(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return Whether @a tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically. */ bool get_visible_vertical() const; @@ -259,8 +233,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether @a tool_item is considered important. See * set_is_important() * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return true if @a tool_item is considered important. */ bool get_is_important() const; @@ -271,8 +243,6 @@ public: * only tool buttons with the "is_important" property set have labels, an * effect known as "priority text" * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param is_important Whether the tool item should be considered important. */ void set_is_important(bool is_important = true); @@ -282,8 +252,6 @@ public: * Gtk::ToolItem should call this function to find out how text should * be ellipsized. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A Pango::EllipsizeMode indicating how text in @a tool_item * should be ellipsized. */ @@ -293,8 +261,6 @@ public: * Gtk::ToolItem should call this function to find out what size icons * they should use. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A Gtk::IconSize indicating the icon size * used for @a tool_item. */ @@ -304,8 +270,6 @@ public: * Gtk::ToolItem should call this function to find out what size icons * they should use. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A Gtk::Orientation indicating the orientation * used for @a tool_item. */ @@ -328,8 +292,6 @@ public: * Gtk::ToolButton::has_text_horizontally that makes tool buttons not * show labels when the toolbar style is GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A Gtk::ToolbarStyle indicating the toolbar style used * for @a tool_item. */ @@ -340,8 +302,6 @@ public: * of the Gtk::ToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured signal to find out the * relief style of buttons. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return A Gtk::ReliefStyle indicating the relief style used * for @a tool_item. */ @@ -352,8 +312,6 @@ public: * Gtk::ToolItem should call this function to find out how text should * be aligned. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment * used for @a tool_item. */ @@ -363,8 +321,6 @@ public: * Gtk::ToolItem should call this function to find out how text should * be orientated. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A Gtk::Orientation indicating the text orientation * used for @a tool_item. */ @@ -374,8 +330,6 @@ public: * Custom subclasses of Gtk::ToolItem should call this function * and use the size group for labels. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A Gtk::SizeGroup. */ Glib::RefPtr get_text_size_group(); @@ -384,8 +338,6 @@ public: * Custom subclasses of Gtk::ToolItem should call this function * and use the size group for labels. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return A Gtk::SizeGroup. */ Glib::RefPtr get_text_size_group() const; @@ -395,8 +347,6 @@ public: * set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the Gtk::MenuItem * that is going to appear in the overflow menu. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The Gtk::MenuItem that is going to appear in the * overflow menu for @a tool_item. */ @@ -406,8 +356,6 @@ public: * set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the Gtk::MenuItem * that is going to appear in the overflow menu. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The Gtk::MenuItem that is going to appear in the * overflow menu for @a tool_item. */ @@ -421,8 +369,6 @@ public: * @a menu_item_ids must match ensures that a Gtk::ToolItem * will not inadvertently change a menu item that they did not create. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param menu_item_id A string used to identify the menu item. * @return The Gtk::MenuItem passed to * set_proxy_menu_item(), if the @a menu_item_ids @@ -438,8 +384,6 @@ public: * @a menu_item_ids must match ensures that a Gtk::ToolItem * will not inadvertently change a menu item that they did not create. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param menu_item_id A string used to identify the menu item. * @return The Gtk::MenuItem passed to * set_proxy_menu_item(), if the @a menu_item_ids @@ -451,8 +395,6 @@ public: * @a menu_item_id is used to identify the caller of this function and * should also be used with get_proxy_menu_item(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param menu_item_id A string used to identify @a menu_item. * @param menu_item A Gtk::MenuItem to be used in the overflow menu. */ @@ -466,8 +408,6 @@ public: * * The function must be called when the tool item changes what it * will do in response to the Gtk::ToolItem::signal_create_menu_proxy() signal. - * - * @newin{2,6} */ void rebuild_menu(); @@ -475,8 +415,6 @@ public: /** Emits the signal Gtk::ToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @a tool_item. * Gtk::Toolbar and other Gtk::ToolShell implementations use this function * to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes. - * - * @newin{2,14} */ void toolbar_reconfigured(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitemgroup.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitemgroup.h index 4b5db147e0..7acb8c3a3f 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitemgroup.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolitemgroup.h @@ -44,8 +44,6 @@ namespace Gtk /** A ToolItemGroup is used together with ToolPalette to add ToolItems to a * palette-like container with different categories and drag and drop support. - * - * @newin{2,20} * @ingroup Widgets * @ingroup Containers */ @@ -114,8 +112,6 @@ public: /** Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header * of the group. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param label The new human-readable label of of the group. */ void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label); @@ -124,23 +120,17 @@ public: * The label widget is displayed in the header of the group, in place * of the usual label. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param label_widget The widget to be displayed in place of the usual label. */ void set_label_widget(Widget& label_widget); /** Sets whether the @a group should be collapsed or expanded. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param collapsed Whether the @a group should be collapsed or expanded. */ void set_collapsed(bool collapsed = true); /** Sets the ellipsization mode which should be used by labels in @a group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param ellipsize The Pango::EllipsizeMode labels in @a group should use. */ @@ -149,16 +139,12 @@ public: /** Set the button relief of the group header. * See Gtk::Button::set_relief() for details. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param style The Gtk::ReliefStyle. */ void set_header_relief(ReliefStyle style); /** Gets the label of @a group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The label of @a group. The label is an internal string of @a group * and must not be modified. Note that 0 is returned if a custom @@ -170,8 +156,6 @@ public: /** Gets the label widget of @a group. * See set_label_widget(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The label widget of @a group. */ Widget* get_label_widget(); @@ -179,32 +163,24 @@ public: /** Gets the label widget of @a group. * See set_label_widget(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The label widget of @a group. */ const Widget* get_label_widget() const; /** Gets whether @a group is collapsed or expanded. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return true if @a group is collapsed, false if it is expanded. */ bool get_collapsed() const; /** Gets the ellipsization mode of @a group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The Pango::EllipsizeMode of @a group. */ Pango::EllipsizeMode get_ellipsize() const; /** Gets the relief mode of the header button of @a group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The Gtk::ReliefStyle. */ @@ -212,8 +188,6 @@ public: /** Inserts @a item at @a position in the list of children of @a group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param item The Gtk::ToolItem to insert into @a group. * @param position The position of @a item in @a group, starting with 0. @@ -229,8 +203,6 @@ public: /** Sets the position of @a item in the list of children of @a group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param item The Gtk::ToolItem to move to a new position, should * be a child of @a group. @@ -240,8 +212,6 @@ public: void set_item_position(ToolItem& item, int position); /** Gets the position of @a item in @a group as index. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param item A Gtk::ToolItem. * @return The index of @a item in @a group or -1 if @a item is no child of @a group. @@ -250,8 +220,6 @@ public: /** Gets the number of tool items in @a group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The number of tool items in @a group. */ @@ -259,8 +227,6 @@ public: /** Gets the tool item at @a index in group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param index The index. * @return The Gtk::ToolItem at index. @@ -268,8 +234,6 @@ public: ToolItem* get_nth_item(guint index); /** Gets the tool item at @a index in group. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param index The index. * @return The Gtk::ToolItem at index. @@ -278,8 +242,6 @@ public: /** Gets the tool item at position (x, y). - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param x The x position. * @param y The y position. @@ -288,8 +250,6 @@ public: ToolItem* get_drop_item(int x, int y); /** Gets the tool item at position (x, y). - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param x The x position. * @param y The y position. diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolpalette.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolpalette.h index 9dc003694d..a14c4649fd 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolpalette.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolpalette.h @@ -124,8 +124,6 @@ namespace Gtk * target widget. Then get_drag_item() can be used to get the dragged item in * the "drag-data-received" signal handler of the drag target. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @ingroup Widgets * @ingroup Containers */ @@ -195,8 +193,6 @@ public: * If position is 0 the group will become the first child, if position is * -1 it will become the last child. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param group A Gtk::ToolItemGroup which is a child of palette. * @param position A new index for group. */ @@ -205,16 +201,12 @@ public: /** Sets whether the group should be exclusive or not. * If an exclusive group is expanded all other groups are collapsed. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param group A Gtk::ToolItemGroup which is a child of palette. * @param exclusive Whether the group should be exclusive or not. */ void set_exclusive(ToolItemGroup& group, bool exclusive); /** Sets whether the group should be given extra space. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param group A Gtk::ToolItemGroup which is a child of palette. * @param expand Whether the group should be given extra space. @@ -225,8 +217,6 @@ public: /** Gets the position of @a group in @a palette as index. * See set_group_position(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param group A Gtk::ToolItemGroup. * @return The index of group or -1 if @a group is not a child of @a palette. */ @@ -235,8 +225,6 @@ public: /** Gets whether @a group is exclusive or not. * See set_exclusive(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param group A Gtk::ToolItemGroup which is a child of palette. * @return true if @a group is exclusive. */ @@ -245,8 +233,6 @@ public: /** Gets whether group should be given extra space. * See set_expand(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param group A Gtk::ToolItemGroup which is a child of palette. * @return true if group should be given extra space, false otherwise. */ @@ -254,8 +240,6 @@ public: /** Sets the size of icons in the tool palette. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param icon_size The Gtk::IconSize that icons in the tool * palette shall have. @@ -264,14 +248,10 @@ public: /** Unsets the tool palette icon size set with set_icon_size(), * so that user preferences will be used to determine the icon size. - * - * @newin{2,20} */ void unset_icon_size(); /** Sets the style (text, icons or both) of items in the tool palette. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param style The Gtk::ToolbarStyle that items in the tool palette shall have. */ @@ -279,8 +259,6 @@ public: /** Unsets a toolbar style set with set_style(), * so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style. - * - * @newin{2,20} */ void unset_style(); @@ -288,15 +266,11 @@ public: /** Gets the size of icons in the tool palette. * See set_icon_size(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The Gtk::IconSize of icons in the tool palette. */ IconSize get_icon_size() const; /** Gets the style (icons, text or both) of items in the tool palette. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The Gtk::ToolbarStyle of items in the tool palette. */ @@ -306,8 +280,6 @@ public: /** Gets the item at position (x, y). * See get_drop_group(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param x The x position. * @param y The y position. * @return The Gtk::ToolItem at position or 0 if there is no such item. @@ -317,8 +289,6 @@ public: /** Gets the item at position (x, y). * See get_drop_group(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param x The x position. * @param y The y position. * @return The Gtk::ToolItem at position or 0 if there is no such item. @@ -329,8 +299,6 @@ public: /** Gets the group at position (x, y). - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param x The x position. * @param y The y position. @@ -340,8 +308,6 @@ public: ToolItemGroup* get_drop_group(int x, int y); /** Gets the group at position (x, y). - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param x The x position. * @param y The y position. @@ -354,8 +320,6 @@ public: /** Get the dragged item from the selection. * This could be a Gtk::ToolItem or a Gtk::ToolItemGroup. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param selection A Gtk::SelectionData. * @return The dragged item in selection. */ @@ -364,8 +328,6 @@ public: /** Get the dragged item from the selection. * This could be a Gtk::ToolItem or a Gtk::ToolItemGroup. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param selection A Gtk::SelectionData. * @return The dragged item in selection. */ @@ -377,8 +339,6 @@ public: * on button 1 and button 3 press with copy and move actions. * See Gtk::DragSource::set(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param targets The Gtk::ToolPaletteDragTargets * which the widget should support. */ @@ -388,8 +348,6 @@ public: * and sets @a widget as a drag destination for drags from @a palette. * See gtk_drag_dest_set(). * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget which should be a drag destination for @a palette. * @param flags The flags that specify what actions GTK+ should take for drops * on that widget. @@ -401,32 +359,24 @@ public: /** Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The horizontal adjustment of @a palette. */ Adjustment* get_hadjustment(); /** Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The horizontal adjustment of @a palette. */ const Adjustment* get_hadjustment() const; /** Gets the vertical adjustment of the tool palette. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The vertical adjustment of @a palette. */ Adjustment* get_vadjustment(); /** Gets the vertical adjustment of the tool palette. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The vertical adjustment of @a palette. */ @@ -434,16 +384,12 @@ public: /** Gets the target entry for a dragged Gtk::ToolItem. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The Gtk::TargetEntry for a dragged item. */ static TargetEntry get_drag_target_item(); /** Get the target entry for a dragged Gtk::ToolItemGroup. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The Gtk::TargetEntry for a dragged group. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolshell.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolshell.h index 2e69d130da..52478c9f9e 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolshell.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/toolshell.h @@ -55,8 +55,6 @@ namespace Gtk /** A base class for containers containing ToolItem widgets. * This interface allows container widgets to provide additional information when embedding ToolItem widgets. - * - * @newin{2,14} */ class ToolShell : public Glib::Interface @@ -130,8 +128,6 @@ public: /** Retrieves the icon size for the tool shell. Tool items must not call this * function directly, but rely on Gtk::ToolItem::get_icon_size() instead. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The current size for icons of @a shell. */ IconSize get_icon_size() const; @@ -140,8 +136,6 @@ public: * call this function directly, but rely on Gtk::ToolItem::get_orientation() * instead. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The current orientation of @a shell. */ Orientation get_orientation() const; @@ -150,8 +144,6 @@ public: * not call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_style() * instead. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The current style of @a shell. */ ToolbarStyle get_style() const; @@ -159,8 +151,6 @@ public: /** Returns the relief style of buttons on @a shell. Tool items must not call this * function directly, but rely on Gtk::ToolItem::get_relief_style() instead. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @return The relief style of buttons on @a shell. */ ReliefStyle get_relief_style() const; @@ -171,8 +161,6 @@ public: * * Tool items must not call this function directly, but rely on * Gtk::ToolItem::rebuild_menu() instead. - * - * @newin{2,14} */ void rebuild_menu(); @@ -180,8 +168,6 @@ public: * call this function directly, but rely on Gtk::ToolItem::get_text_orientation() * instead. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The current text orientation of @a shell. */ Orientation get_text_orientation() const; @@ -190,8 +176,6 @@ public: * call this function directly, but rely on Gtk::ToolItem::get_text_alignment() * instead. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The current text alignment of @a shell. */ float get_text_alignment() const; @@ -200,8 +184,6 @@ public: * call this function directly, but rely on Gtk::ToolItem::get_ellipsize_mode() * instead. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The current ellipsize mode of @a shell. */ Pango::EllipsizeMode get_ellipsize_mode() const; @@ -211,8 +193,6 @@ public: * call this function directly, but rely on Gtk::ToolItem::get_text_size_group() * instead. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The current text size group of @a shell. */ Glib::RefPtr get_text_size_group(); @@ -221,8 +201,6 @@ public: * call this function directly, but rely on Gtk::ToolItem::get_text_size_group() * instead. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @return The current text size group of @a shell. */ Glib::RefPtr get_text_size_group() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/tooltip.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/tooltip.h index 47fac0d5fd..8f957b6c9a 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/tooltip.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/tooltip.h @@ -87,8 +87,6 @@ namespace Gtk * using Gtk::Widget::get_tooltip_window() and manipulate it as you * wish. The semantics of the return value are exactly as before, * return true to show the window, false to not show it. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ class Tooltip : public Glib::Object @@ -148,8 +146,6 @@ public: * with the Pango text markup language. * If @a markup is 0, the label will be hidden. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param markup A markup string (see Pango markup format) or 0. */ void set_markup(const Glib::ustring& markup); @@ -157,8 +153,6 @@ public: /** Sets the text of the tooltip to be @a text. If @a text is 0, the label * will be hidden. See also set_markup(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param text A text string or 0. */ void set_text(const Glib::ustring& markup); @@ -166,8 +160,6 @@ public: /** Sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be * @a pixbuf. If @a pixbuf is 0, the image will be hidden. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf, or 0. */ void set_icon(const Glib::RefPtr& pixbuf); @@ -176,8 +168,6 @@ public: * to be the icon indicated by @a gicon with the size indicated * by @a size. If @a gicon is 0, the image will be hidden. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param gicon A Icon representing the icon, or 0. * @param size A stock icon size. */ @@ -189,8 +179,6 @@ public: * the stock item indicated by @a stock_id with the size indicated * by @a size. If @a stock_id is 0, the image will be hidden. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param stock_id A stock id, or 0. * @param size A stock icon size. */ @@ -200,8 +188,6 @@ public: * the icon indicated by @a icon_name with the size indicated * by @a size. If @a icon_name is 0, the image will be hidden. * - * @newin{2,14} - * * @param icon_name An icon name, or 0. * @param size A stock icon size. */ @@ -216,8 +202,6 @@ public: * and set_icon(). * * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param custom_widget A Gtk::Widget, or 0 to unset the old custom widget. */ void set_custom(Widget& custom_widget); @@ -231,8 +215,6 @@ public: * functions for this: Gtk::TreeView::set_tooltip_row() and * Gtk::TreeView::set_tooltip_cell(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param rect A Gdk::Rectangle. */ void set_tip_area(const Gdk::Rectangle& rect); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodel.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodel.h index 20cba6b22b..c5e28ff001 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodel.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodel.h @@ -390,8 +390,6 @@ public: /** Emits the "rows_reordered" signal on the tree model. This should be called by * custom models when their rows have been reordered. This method overload is for nodes whose * path has a depth of 0. - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param path A tree path pointing to the tree node whose children have been reordered. * @param new_order An array of integers mapping the current position of each child * to its old position before the re-ordering, i.e. @a new_order[newpos] = oldpos. @@ -417,8 +415,6 @@ public: * separated list of numbers. For example, "4:10:0:3" would be an * acceptable return value for this string. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param iter An Gtk::TreeIter. * @return The string. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelfilter.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelfilter.h index 702392d02d..83c43b82f9 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelfilter.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelfilter.h @@ -169,8 +169,6 @@ public: * TYPE_BOOLEAN, where true means that a row is visible, and false * if not. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param column A int which is the column containing the visible information. */ void set_visible_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& column); @@ -180,24 +178,18 @@ public: * TYPE_BOOLEAN, where true means that a row is visible, and false * if not. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param column A int which is the column containing the visible information. */ void set_visible_column(int column); /** Returns a pointer to the child model of @a filter. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A pointer to a Gtk::TreeModel. */ Glib::RefPtr get_model(); /** Returns a pointer to the child model of @a filter. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A pointer to a Gtk::TreeModel. */ @@ -227,8 +219,6 @@ public: * child model or points to a row which is not visible in @a filter, then 0 * is returned. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @deprecated Use convert_child_path_to_path(const Path& child_path) const * * @param child_path A Gtk::TreePath to convert. @@ -245,8 +235,6 @@ public: * point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If @a filter_path * does not point to a location in the child model, 0 is returned. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @deprecated convert_path_to_child_path(const Path& filter_path) const * * @param filter_path A Gtk::TreePath to convert. @@ -262,8 +250,6 @@ public: * child model or points to a row which is not visible in @a filter, then 0 * is returned. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param child_path A Gtk::TreePath to convert. * @return A newly allocated Gtk::TreePath, or 0. */ @@ -274,8 +260,6 @@ public: * point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If @a filter_path * does not point to a location in the child model, 0 is returned. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param filter_path A Gtk::TreePath to convert. * @return A newly allocated Gtk::TreePath, or 0. */ @@ -284,8 +268,6 @@ public: /** Emits ::row_changed for each row in the child model, which causes * the filter to re-evaluate whether a row is visible or not. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void refilter(); @@ -295,8 +277,6 @@ public: * being filtered is static (and doesn't change often) and there has been * a lot of unreffed access to nodes. As a side effect of this function, * all unreffed iters will be invalid. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void clear_cache(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelsort.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelsort.h index 7072ce9ba4..9b4cb77c11 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelsort.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treemodelsort.h @@ -201,8 +201,6 @@ public: * * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this Gtk::TreeModelSort. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param iter A Gtk::TreeIter. * @return true if the iter is valid, false if the iter is invalid. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treepath.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treepath.h index f34cd9b5aa..631e158df9 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treepath.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treepath.h @@ -130,7 +130,6 @@ public: TreePath& operator=(const TreeModel::iterator& iter); /** Checks that the path is not empty, by calling empty(). - * @newin{2,16} */ operator bool() const; diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treerowreference.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treerowreference.h index 4ec39db725..c0eef64ec1 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treerowreference.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treerowreference.h @@ -97,16 +97,12 @@ public: /** Returns the model that the row reference is monitoring. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return The model. */ Glib::RefPtr get_model(); /** Returns the model that the row reference is monitoring. - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return The model. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeselection.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeselection.h index c72cc17c1b..508708d6aa 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeselection.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeselection.h @@ -224,8 +224,6 @@ public: /** Returns the number of rows that have been selected in @a tree. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return The number of rows selected. */ @@ -320,8 +318,6 @@ public: /** Unselects a range of nodes, determined by @a start_path and @a end_path * inclusive. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param start_path The initial node of the range. * @param end_path The initial node of the range. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treestore.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treestore.h index 8d3c461dfe..421d73428c 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treestore.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treestore.h @@ -201,8 +201,6 @@ public: /** Swaps @a a and @a b in the same level of @a tree_store. Note that this function * only works with unsorted stores. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param a A Gtk::TreeIter. * @param b Another Gtk::TreeIter. */ @@ -249,8 +247,6 @@ public: * * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this Gtk::TreeStore. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param iter A Gtk::TreeIter. * @return true if the iter is valid, false if the iter is invalid. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeview.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeview.h index b78216bb3d..b8d9f87a25 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeview.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeview.h @@ -293,8 +293,6 @@ public: /** Remove the model from the TreeView. * * @see set_model(). - * - * @newin{2,8} */ void unset_model(); @@ -381,8 +379,6 @@ public: void columns_autosize(); /** Returns whether all header columns are clickable. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return true if all header columns are clickable, otherwise false. */ @@ -804,8 +800,6 @@ public: /** Expands the row at @a path. This will also expand all parent rows of * @a path as necessary. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param path Path to a row. */ void expand_to_path(const TreeModel::Path& path); @@ -900,8 +894,6 @@ public: * If @a path is invalid for @a model, the current cursor (if any) will be unset * and the function will return without failing. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param path A Gtk::TreePath. * @param focus_column A Gtk::TreeViewColumn, or 0. * @param focus_cell A Gtk::CellRenderer, or 0. @@ -979,8 +971,6 @@ public: * @param cell_y A reference where the Y coordinate relative to the cell * can be placed * @return true if a row exists at that coordinate. - * - * @newin{2,8} */ bool get_path_at_pos(int x, int y, TreeModel::Path& path, TreeViewColumn*& column, int& cell_x, int& cell_y) const; @@ -1001,8 +991,6 @@ public: * @param y The y position to be identified (relative to bin_window). * @param path A reference to a TreeModel::Path to be filled in * @return true if a row exists at that coordinate. - * - * newin{2,16} */ bool get_path_at_pos(int x, int y, TreeModel::Path& path) const; @@ -1345,8 +1333,6 @@ public: * entry for @a tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, 0 * will be returned. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The entry currently in use as search entry. */ Entry* get_search_entry(); @@ -1355,8 +1341,6 @@ public: * entry for @a tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, 0 * will be returned. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The entry currently in use as search entry. */ const Entry* get_search_entry() const; @@ -1367,8 +1351,6 @@ public: * @a entry will make the interactive search code use the built-in popup * entry again. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param entry The entry the interactive search code of @a tree_view should use or 0. */ void set_search_entry(Entry& entry); @@ -1381,8 +1363,6 @@ public: /** Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the * tree (the full scrollable area of the tree). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param wx X coordinate relative to the widget. * @param wy Y coordinate relative to the widget. * @param tx Return location for tree X coordinate. @@ -1393,8 +1373,6 @@ public: /** Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree) * to widget coordinates. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param tx X coordinate relative to the tree. * @param ty Y coordinate relative to the tree. * @param wx Return location for widget X coordinate. @@ -1405,8 +1383,6 @@ public: /** Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window * (see get_bin_window()). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param wx X coordinate relative to the widget. * @param wy Y coordinate relative to the widget. * @param bx Return location for bin_window X coordinate. @@ -1417,8 +1393,6 @@ public: /** Converts bin_window coordinates (see get_bin_window()) * to widget relative coordinates. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param bx Bin_window X coordinate. * @param by Bin_window Y coordinate. * @param wx Return location for widget X coordinate. @@ -1429,8 +1403,6 @@ public: /** Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree) * to bin_window coordinates. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param tx Tree X coordinate. * @param ty Tree Y coordinate. * @param bx Return location for X coordinate relative to bin_window. @@ -1441,8 +1413,6 @@ public: /** Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the * tree (the full scrollable area of the tree). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param bx X coordinate relative to bin_window. * @param by Y coordinate relative to bin_window. * @param tx Return location for tree X coordinate. @@ -1457,15 +1427,11 @@ public: * Only enable this option if all rows are the same height and all * columns are of type Gtk::TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param enable true to enable fixed height mode. */ void set_fixed_height_mode(bool enable = true); /** Returns whether fixed height mode is turned on for @a tree_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return true if @a tree_view is in fixed height mode. */ @@ -1476,15 +1442,11 @@ public: * Currently, this works only for the selection modes * Gtk::SELECTION_SINGLE and Gtk::SELECTION_BROWSE. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param hover true to enable hover selection mode. */ void set_hover_selection(bool hover = true); /** Returns whether hover selection mode is turned on for @a tree_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return true if @a tree_view is in hover selection mode. */ @@ -1494,15 +1456,11 @@ public: * Hover expansion makes rows expand or collapse if the pointer * moves over them. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param expand true to enable hover selection mode. */ void set_hover_expand(bool expand = true); /** Returns whether hover expansion mode is turned on for @a tree_view. - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return true if @a tree_view is in hover expansion mode. */ @@ -1512,8 +1470,6 @@ public: * is Gtk::SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select * multiple rows by dragging the mouse. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param enable true to enable rubber banding. */ void set_rubber_banding(bool enable = true); @@ -1522,8 +1478,6 @@ public: * selection mode is Gtk::SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the * user to select multiple rows by dragging the mouse. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if rubber banding in @a tree_view is enabled. */ bool get_rubber_banding() const; @@ -1533,8 +1487,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether a rubber banding operation is currently being done * in @a tree_view. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return true if a rubber banding operation is currently being * done in @a tree_view. */ @@ -1549,8 +1501,6 @@ public: /** Sets which grid lines to draw in @a tree_view. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @param grid_lines A Gtk::TreeViewGridLines value indicating which grid lines to * enable. @@ -1558,8 +1508,6 @@ public: void set_grid_lines(TreeViewGridLines grid_lines); /** Returns which grid lines are enabled in @a tree_view. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return A Gtk::TreeViewGridLines value indicating which grid lines * are enabled. @@ -1570,15 +1518,11 @@ public: /** Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in @a tree_view. * This does not have any visible effects for lists. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param enabled true to enable tree line drawing, false otherwise. */ void set_enable_tree_lines(bool enable = true); /** Returns whether or not tree lines are drawn in @a tree_view. - * - * @newin{2,10} * * @return true if tree lines are drawn in @a tree_view, false * otherwise. @@ -1594,15 +1538,11 @@ public: * set_level_indentation(). * This does not have any visible effects for lists. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param enabled true to enable expander drawing, false otherwise. */ void set_show_expanders(bool enabled = true); /** Returns whether or not expanders are drawn in @a tree_view. - * - * @newin{2,12} * * @return true if expanders are drawn in @a tree_view, false * otherwise. @@ -1615,8 +1555,6 @@ public: * indentation will be used. * This does not have any visible effects for lists. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param indentation The amount, in pixels, of extra indentation in @a tree_view. */ void set_level_indentation(int indentation); @@ -1624,8 +1562,6 @@ public: /** Returns the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation for child levels * in @a tree_view. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The amount of extra indentation for child levels in * @a tree_view. A return value of 0 means that this feature is disabled. */ @@ -1656,8 +1592,6 @@ public: * * See also set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param tooltip A Gtk::Tooltip. * @param path A Gtk::TreePath or 0. * @param column A Gtk::TreeViewColumn or 0. @@ -1685,8 +1619,6 @@ public: * to be relative to Gtk::TreeView's bin_window if keyboard_tooltip is false. * * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ bool get_tooltip_context_path(int& x, int& y, bool keyboard_tip, @@ -1711,8 +1643,6 @@ public: * to be relative to Gtk::TreeView's bin_window if keyboard_tooltip is false. * * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ bool get_tooltip_context_iter(int& x, int& y, bool keyboard_tip, @@ -1730,8 +1660,6 @@ public: * Note that the signal handler sets the text with Gtk::Tooltip::set_markup(), * so &, <, etc have to be escaped in the text. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param column An integer, which is a valid column number for @a tree_view's model. */ void set_tooltip_column(int column); @@ -1739,8 +1667,6 @@ public: /** Returns the column of @a tree_view's model which is being used for * displaying tooltips on @a tree_view's rows. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The index of the tooltip column that is currently being * used, or -1 if this is disabled. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeviewcolumn.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeviewcolumn.h index b0b5aa43b5..0dd4817534 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeviewcolumn.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/treeviewcolumn.h @@ -464,15 +464,11 @@ public: * option set, then the last column gets all extra space. By default, every * column is created with this false. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param expand true if the column should take available extra space, false if not. */ void set_expand(bool expand = true); /** Return true if the column expands to take any available space. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return true, if the column expands. */ @@ -685,8 +681,6 @@ public: /** Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @a cell, if the column contains * 2 or more editable and activatable cells. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer. */ void focus_cell(CellRenderer& cell); @@ -706,8 +700,6 @@ public: /** Flags the column, and the cell renderers added to this column, to have * their sizes renegotiated. - * - * @newin{2,8} */ void queue_resize(); @@ -716,8 +708,6 @@ public: * If @a column is currently not inserted in any tree view, 0 is * returned. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The tree view wherein @a column has * been inserted if any, 0 otherwise. */ @@ -727,8 +717,6 @@ public: * If @a column is currently not inserted in any tree view, 0 is * returned. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The tree view wherein @a column has * been inserted if any, 0 otherwise. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/uimanager.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/uimanager.h index 2f2cf74e78..b6ffd27051 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/uimanager.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/uimanager.h @@ -264,8 +264,6 @@ namespace Gtk * - add an insensitive "Empty" item * * The behaviour is chosen based on the "hide_if_empty" property of the action to which the submenu is associated. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ class UIManager : public Glib::Object @@ -331,8 +329,6 @@ public: * Note that this only affects regular menus. Generated popup * menus never have tearoff menu items. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param add_tearoffs Whether tearoff menu items are added. */ void set_add_tearoffs(bool add_tearoffs = true); @@ -340,8 +336,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether menus generated by this Gtk::UIManager * will have tearoff menu items. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return Whether tearoff menu items are added. */ bool get_add_tearoffs() const; @@ -350,8 +344,6 @@ public: * with @a self. Actions in earlier groups hide actions with the same * name in later groups. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param action_group The action group to be inserted. * @param pos The position at which the group will be inserted. */ @@ -360,16 +352,12 @@ public: /** Removes an action group from the list of action groups associated * with @a self. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param action_group The action group to be removed. */ void remove_action_group(const Glib::RefPtr& action_group); /** Returns the list of action groups associated with @a self. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A List of * action groups. The list is owned by GTK+ @@ -378,8 +366,6 @@ public: Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr > get_action_groups(); /** Returns the list of action groups associated with @a self. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A List of * action groups. The list is owned by GTK+ @@ -389,16 +375,12 @@ public: /** Returns the Gtk::AccelGroup associated with @a self. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The Gtk::AccelGroup. */ Glib::RefPtr get_accel_group(); /** Returns the Gtk::AccelGroup associated with @a self. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return The Gtk::AccelGroup. */ @@ -418,8 +400,6 @@ public: * function to some container or explicitly ref them, they will survive the * destruction of the ui manager. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param path A path. * @return The widget found by following the path, or 0 if no widget * was found. @@ -440,8 +420,6 @@ public: * function to some container or explicitly ref them, they will survive the * destruction of the ui manager. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param path A path. * @return The widget found by following the path, or 0 if no widget * was found. @@ -450,8 +428,6 @@ public: /** Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param types Specifies the types of toplevel widgets to include. Allowed * types are Gtk::UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR, Gtk::UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR and @@ -462,8 +438,6 @@ public: Glib::SListHandle get_toplevels(UIManagerItemType types); /** Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param types Specifies the types of toplevel widgets to include. Allowed * types are Gtk::UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR, Gtk::UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR and @@ -477,8 +451,6 @@ public: /** Looks up an action by following a path. See gtk_ui_manager_get_widget() * for more information about paths. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param path A path. * @return The action whose proxy widget is found by following the path, * or 0 if no widget was found. @@ -488,8 +460,6 @@ public: /** Looks up an action by following a path. See gtk_ui_manager_get_widget() * for more information about paths. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param path A path. * @return The action whose proxy widget is found by following the path, * or 0 if no widget was found. @@ -505,7 +475,6 @@ public: * @param buffer the string to parse * @result The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used to unmerge the UI with remove_ui(). If an error occurred, the return value is 0. * @throws exception - * @newin{2,4} */ ui_merge_id add_ui_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer); @@ -513,8 +482,6 @@ public: /** Parses a file containing a UI definition and * merges it with the current contents of @a self. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param filename The name of the file to parse. * @return The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used * to unmerge the UI with gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui(). If an error occurred, @@ -534,8 +501,6 @@ public: * * @a see add_ui_separator(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param merge_id The merge id for the merged UI, see gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id(). * @param path A path. * @param name The name for the added UI element. @@ -554,8 +519,6 @@ public: * the place determined by @a path. * * @see add_ui(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * @param merge_id The merge id for the merged UI, see gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id(). * @param path A path. * @param name The name for the added UI element. @@ -567,16 +530,12 @@ public: /** Unmerges the part of @a selfs content identified by @a merge_id. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @param merge_id A merge id as returned by gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_string(). */ void remove_ui(ui_merge_id merge_id); /** Creates a UI definition of the merged UI. - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of * the merged UI. @@ -591,16 +550,12 @@ public: * the main window before showing it: * * [C example ellipted] - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void ensure_update(); /** Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with * gtk_ui_manager_add_ui(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return An unused merge id. */ ui_merge_id new_merge_id(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/viewport.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/viewport.h index e720d1618b..0471e3584c 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/viewport.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/viewport.h @@ -177,16 +177,12 @@ public: /** Gets the bin window of the Gtk::Viewport. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return A Gdk::Window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_bin_window(); /** Gets the bin window of the Gtk::Viewport. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return A Gdk::Window. */ @@ -194,16 +190,12 @@ public: /** Gets the view window of the Gtk::Viewport. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::Window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_view_window(); /** Gets the view window of the Gtk::Viewport. - * - * @newin{2,22} * * @return A Gdk::Window. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/widget.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/widget.h index c9d0bec613..1fbadc01fa 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/widget.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/widget.h @@ -781,8 +781,6 @@ public: * * [C example ellipted] * - * @newin{2,22} - * * @param event A Gdk::Event of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE. * @return The return value from the event signal emission: true * if the event was handled, and false otherwise. @@ -867,8 +865,6 @@ public: * grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a * widget. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param can_focus Whether or not @a widget can own the input focus. */ void set_can_focus(bool can_focus = true); @@ -876,8 +872,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether @a widget can own the input focus. See * set_can_focus(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if @a widget can own the input focus, false otherwise. */ bool get_can_focus() const; @@ -887,8 +881,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether @a widget can own the input focus. See * set_can_focus(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @deprecated Replaced by get_can_focus(). * * @return true if @a widget can own the input focus, false otherwise. @@ -901,8 +893,6 @@ public: * is_focus() for the difference between having the global * input focus, and only having the focus within a toplevel. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the widget has the global input focus. */ bool has_focus() const; @@ -934,8 +924,6 @@ public: * grab_default() for details about the meaning of * "default". * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param can_default Whether or not @a widget can be a default widget. */ void set_can_default(bool can_default = true); @@ -943,8 +931,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether @a widget can be a default widget. See * set_can_default(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if @a widget can be a default widget, false otherwise. */ bool get_can_default() const; @@ -954,8 +940,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether @a widget can be a default widget. See * set_can_default(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @deprecated Replaced by get_can_default(). * * @return true if @a widget can be a default widget, false otherwise. @@ -967,8 +951,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether @a widget is the current default widget within its * toplevel. See set_can_default(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if @a widget is the current default widget within * its toplevel, false otherwise. */ @@ -990,8 +972,6 @@ public: * See grab_default() for details about the meaning of * "default". * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param receives_default Whether or not @a widget can be a default widget. */ void set_receives_default(bool receives_default = true); @@ -1002,8 +982,6 @@ public: * * See set_receives_default(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if @a widget acts as default widget when focussed, * false otherwise. */ @@ -1014,8 +992,6 @@ public: * * See also gtk_grab_add(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack. */ bool has_grab() const; @@ -1069,8 +1045,6 @@ public: void set_state(StateType state); /** Returns the widget's state. See set_state(). - * - * @newin{2,18} * * @return The state of @a widget. */ @@ -1091,8 +1065,6 @@ public: * The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its * own and its parent widget's sensitivity. See is_sensitive(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the widget is sensitive. */ bool get_sensitive() const; @@ -1100,8 +1072,6 @@ public: /** Returns the widget's effective sensitivity, which means * it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensntive * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the widget is effectively sensitive. */ bool is_sensitive() const; @@ -1114,8 +1084,6 @@ public: * but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on * some condition. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param visible Whether the widget should be shown or not. */ void set_visible(bool visible = true); @@ -1126,8 +1094,6 @@ public: * * See set_visible(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the widget is visible. */ bool get_visible() const; @@ -1143,8 +1109,6 @@ public: * This function should only be called by widget implementations, * and they should call it in their init() function. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param has_window Whether or not @a widget has a window. */ void set_has_window(bool has_window = true); @@ -1152,8 +1116,6 @@ public: /** Determines whether @a widget has a Gdk::Window of its own. See * set_has_window(). * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if @a widget has a window, false otherwise. */ bool get_has_window() const; @@ -1162,8 +1124,6 @@ public: * Gtk::Window and Gtk::Invisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel * widgets have no parent widget. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if @a widget is a toplevel, false otherwise. */ bool get_is_toplevel() const; @@ -1171,23 +1131,17 @@ public: /** Determines whether @a widget can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn * to if it is mapped and visible. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if @a widget is drawable, false otherwise. */ bool get_is_drawable() const; /** Determines whether @a widget is realized. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return true if @a widget is realized, false otherwise. */ bool get_realized() const; /** Whether the widget is mapped. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return true if the widget is mapped, false otherwise. */ @@ -1218,8 +1172,6 @@ public: * * See set_app_paintable() * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the widget is app paintable. */ bool get_app_paintable() const; @@ -1251,8 +1203,6 @@ public: * * See set_double_buffered() * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @return true if the widget is double buffered. */ bool get_double_buffered() const; @@ -1324,24 +1274,18 @@ public: * * This function should only be called by custom widget implementations, * and they should call it in their on_realize() function. - * - * @newin{2,18} * @param window A Gdk::Window. */ void set_window(const Glib::RefPtr& window); /** Returns the widget's window if it is realized, 0 otherwise - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return @a widget's window. */ Glib::RefPtr get_window(); /** Returns the widget's window if it is realized, 0 otherwise - * - * @newin{2,14} * * @return @a widget's window. */ @@ -1356,8 +1300,6 @@ public: /** Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used * directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method. * - * @newin{2,18} - * * @param allocation A pointer to a Gtk::Allocation to copy from. */ void set_allocation(const Allocation& allocation); @@ -1459,8 +1401,6 @@ public: * entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces * that require entering license keys. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param direction Direction of focus movement. * @return true if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, false * if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard @@ -1475,8 +1415,6 @@ public: * Note that the effect of Gdk::Window::beep() can be configured in many * ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment * or window manager that is used. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void error_bell(); @@ -1674,8 +1612,6 @@ public: * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should * free those resources when the widget is unrealized. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The Gdk::Screen for the toplevel for this widget. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen(); @@ -1689,8 +1625,6 @@ public: * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should * free those resources when the widget is unrealized. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The Gdk::Screen for the toplevel for this widget. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen() const; @@ -1701,8 +1635,6 @@ public: * screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel * window at the top. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return true if there is a Gdk::Screen associcated * with the widget. */ @@ -1717,8 +1649,6 @@ public: * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should * free those resources when the widget is unrealized. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The Gdk::Display for the toplevel for this widget. */ Glib::RefPtr get_display(); @@ -1731,8 +1661,6 @@ public: * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should * free those resources when the widget is unrealized. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The Gdk::Display for the toplevel for this widget. */ Glib::RefPtr get_display() const; @@ -1747,8 +1675,6 @@ public: * create display specific resources when a widget has been realized, * and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The Gdk::Window root window for the toplevel for this widget. */ Glib::RefPtr get_root_window(); @@ -1762,8 +1688,6 @@ public: * create display specific resources when a widget has been realized, * and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @return The Gdk::Window root window for the toplevel for this widget. */ Glib::RefPtr get_root_window() const; @@ -1786,8 +1710,6 @@ public: * associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel * window. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param selection A Gdk::Atom which identifies the clipboard * to use. Gdk::SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the * default clipboard. Another common value @@ -1805,8 +1727,6 @@ public: * associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel * window. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param selection A Gdk::Atom which identifies the clipboard * to use. Gdk::SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the * default clipboard. Another common value @@ -1849,8 +1769,6 @@ public: * * @param clip_rect A Gdk::Rectangle. * @return Gdk::Pixmap snapshot of the widget - * - * @newin{2,14}. */ Glib::RefPtr get_snapshot(Gdk::Rectangle& clip_rect) const; @@ -1870,8 +1788,6 @@ public: * The returned pixmap can be empty. * * @result A Gdk::Pixmap snapshot of the widget - * - * @newin{2,14} */ Glib::RefPtr get_snapshot() const; @@ -1975,8 +1891,6 @@ public: /* STYLE */ /** Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return true if the widget has been looked up through the rc * mechanism, false otherwise. @@ -2131,8 +2045,6 @@ public: * * @param primary the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be allocated). * @param secondary the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be allocated). - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void modify_cursor(const Gdk::Color& primary, const Gdk::Color& secondary); @@ -2401,8 +2313,6 @@ public: * windows which react to mouse click in a nonrectangular region, see * gdk_window_input_shape_combine_mask() for more information. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param shape_mask Shape to be added, or 0 to remove an existing shape. * @param offset_x X position of shape mask with respect to @a window. * @param offset_y Y position of shape mask with respect to @a window. @@ -2435,8 +2345,6 @@ public: * (GFunc)g_object_ref, 0) first, and then unref all the * widgets afterwards. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The list of * mnemonic labels; free this list * with Glib::list_free() when you are done with it. @@ -2454,8 +2362,6 @@ public: * (GFunc)g_object_ref, 0) first, and then unref all the * widgets afterwards. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The list of * mnemonic labels; free this list * with Glib::list_free() when you are done with it. @@ -2468,8 +2374,6 @@ public: * widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update * its internal state at this point as well. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param label A Gtk::Widget that acts as a mnemonic label for @a widget. */ void add_mnemonic_label(Widget& label); @@ -2479,8 +2383,6 @@ public: * must have previously been added to the list with * add_mnemonic_label(). * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param label A Gtk::Widget that was previously set as a mnemnic label for * @a widget with add_mnemonic_label(). */ @@ -2555,8 +2457,6 @@ public: * use Gtk::TargetList::add_text_targets() and * gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget that's a drag destination. */ void drag_dest_add_text_targets(); @@ -2567,8 +2467,6 @@ public: * use Gtk::TargetList::add_image_targets() and * gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget that's a drag destination. */ void drag_dest_add_image_targets(); @@ -2579,8 +2477,6 @@ public: * use Gtk::TargetList::add_uri_targets() and * gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget that's a drag destination. */ void drag_dest_add_uri_targets(); @@ -2620,8 +2516,6 @@ public: /** Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source * to a themed icon. See the docs for Gtk::IconTheme for more details. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget. * @param icon_name Name of icon to use. */ @@ -2634,8 +2528,6 @@ public: * use Gtk::TargetList::add_text_targets() and * set_target_list(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget that's is a drag source. */ void drag_source_add_text_targets(); @@ -2646,8 +2538,6 @@ public: * use Gtk::TargetList::add_uri_targets() and * set_target_list(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget that's is a drag source. */ void drag_source_add_uri_targets(); @@ -2658,8 +2548,6 @@ public: * use Gtk::TargetList::add_image_targets() and * set_target_list(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param widget A Gtk::Widget that's is a drag source. */ void drag_source_add_image_targets(); @@ -2722,8 +2610,6 @@ public: /** This function works like queue_resize(), * except that the widget is not invalidated. - * - * @newin{2,4} */ void queue_resize_no_redraw(); @@ -2731,8 +2617,6 @@ public: * which determines whether calls to show_all() and * hide_all() will affect this widget. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @return The current value of the "no-show-all" property. */ bool get_no_show_all() const; @@ -2744,8 +2628,6 @@ public: * This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally * controlled visibility, see Gtk::UIManager. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param no_show_all The new value for the "no-show-all" property. */ void set_no_show_all(bool no_show_all = true); @@ -2797,8 +2679,6 @@ public: * If the custom window should have the default theming it needs to * have the name "gtk-tooltip", see set_name(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param custom_window A Gtk::Window, or 0. */ void set_tooltip_window(Window& widget); @@ -2807,8 +2687,6 @@ public: * GtkWindow created by default, or the custom tooltip window set * using set_tooltip_window(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The Gtk::Window of the current tooltip. */ Window* get_tooltip_window(); @@ -2816,8 +2694,6 @@ public: /** Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of @a widget * is located. See Gtk::Tooltip::trigger_tooltip_query() for more * information. - * - * @newin{2,12} */ void trigger_tooltip_query(); @@ -2827,8 +2703,6 @@ public: * * See also the GtkWidget:tooltip-text property and Gtk::Tooltip::set_text(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param text The contents of the tooltip for @a widget. */ void set_tooltip_text(const Glib::ustring& text); @@ -2836,8 +2710,6 @@ public: /** Gets the contents of the tooltip for @a widget. * * @return The tooltip text. - * - * @newin{2,12}. */ Glib::ustring get_tooltip_text() const; @@ -2850,8 +2722,6 @@ public: * See also the GtkWidget:tooltip-markup property and * Gtk::Tooltip::set_markup(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param markup The contents of the tooltip for @a widget. */ void set_tooltip_markup(const Glib::ustring& markup); @@ -2859,16 +2729,12 @@ public: /** Gets the contents of the tooltip for @a widget. * * @return The tooltip text. - * - * @newin{2,12}. */ Glib::ustring get_tooltip_markup() const; /** Sets the has-tooltip property on @a widget to @a has_tooltip. See * GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param has_tooltip Whether or not @a widget has a tooltip. */ void set_has_tooltip(bool has_tooltip = TRUE); @@ -2876,8 +2742,6 @@ public: /** Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See * GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return Current value of has-tooltip on @a widget. */ bool get_has_tooltip() const; @@ -2985,8 +2849,6 @@ public: * in the future if used on a widget that has a composited * window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the widget can rely on its alpha * channel being drawn correctly. */ @@ -2997,8 +2859,6 @@ public: /** Returns the Gtk::Action that @a widget is a proxy for. * See also Gtk::Action::get_proxies(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Activatable::get_related_action() instead. * * @return The action that a widget is a proxy for, or @@ -3009,8 +2869,6 @@ public: /** Returns the Gtk::Action that @a widget is a proxy for. * See also Gtk::Action::get_proxies(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Activatable::get_related_action() instead. * * @return The action that a widget is a proxy for, or @@ -3029,8 +2887,6 @@ public: * Normally, size_request() should be used. * * @result The widget's requisition. - * - * @@newin{2,20} */ Requisition get_requisition() const; @@ -4138,8 +3994,6 @@ protected: * This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's * "map" or "unmap" implementation. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param mapped true to mark the widget as mapped. */ void set_mapped(bool mapped = true); @@ -4149,8 +4003,6 @@ protected: * This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's * "realize" or "unrealize" implementation. * - * @newin{2,20} - * * @param realized true to mark the widget as realized. */ void set_realized(bool realized = true); @@ -4166,8 +4018,6 @@ protected: * implementation which does not chain up to its parent class' * "realize" implementation, because one of the parent classes * (finally Gtk::Widget) would attach the style itself. - * - * @newin{2,20} */ void style_attach(); diff --git a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/window.h b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/window.h index db627cafff..dd698e353e 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/window.h +++ b/libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/window.h @@ -816,7 +816,6 @@ public: /** Unsets the current transient window. * @see set_transient_for(). - * @newin{2,20} */ void unset_transient_for(); @@ -848,8 +847,6 @@ public: * Note that setting a window's opacity after the window has been * shown causes it to flicker once on Windows. * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @param opacity Desired opacity, between 0 and 1. */ void set_opacity(double opacity); @@ -857,8 +854,6 @@ public: /** Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See * set_opacity(). * - * @newin{2,12} - * * @return The requested opacity for this window. */ double get_opacity() const; @@ -887,15 +882,11 @@ public: /** Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display * the window in the task bar. This function sets this hint. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param setting true to keep this window from appearing in the task bar. */ void set_skip_taskbar_hint(bool setting = true); /** Gets the value set by set_skip_taskbar_hint() - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return true if window shouldn't be in taskbar. */ @@ -908,15 +899,11 @@ public: * switcher that displays a thumbnail representation of the windows * on the screen.) * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param setting true to keep this window from appearing in the pager. */ void set_skip_pager_hint(bool setting = true); /** Gets the value set by set_skip_pager_hint(). - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return true if window shouldn't be in pager. */ @@ -926,15 +913,11 @@ public: /** Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw * the users attention to the window. This function sets this hint. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param setting true to mark this window as urgent. */ void set_urgency_hint(bool setting = true); /** Gets the value set by set_urgency_hint() - * - * @newin{2,8} * * @return true if window is urgent. */ @@ -944,15 +927,11 @@ public: /** Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive * the input focus. This function sets this hint. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param setting true to let this window receive input focus. */ void set_accept_focus(bool setting = true); /** Gets the value set by set_accept_focus(). - * - * @newin{2,4} * * @return true if window should receive the input focus. */ @@ -962,15 +941,11 @@ public: * the input focus when the window is mapped. This function sets this * hint. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param setting true to let this window receive input focus on map. */ void set_focus_on_map(bool setting = true); /** Gets the value set by set_focus_on_map(). - * - * @newin{2,6} * * @return true if window should receive the input focus when * mapped. @@ -992,8 +967,6 @@ public: /** Sets the Gtk::Window::property_mnemonics_visible() property. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @param setting The new value. */ @@ -1052,24 +1025,18 @@ public: * the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and * then remapped on the new screen. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param screen A Gdk::Screen. */ void set_screen(const Glib::RefPtr& screen); /** Returns the Gdk::Screen associated with @a window. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return A Gdk::Screen. */ Glib::RefPtr get_screen(); /** Returns the Gdk::Screen associated with @a window. - * - * @newin{2,2} * * @return A Gdk::Screen. */ @@ -1193,8 +1160,6 @@ public: * On Windows, this function always works, since there's no window manager * policy involved. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @param setting true to decorate the window as deletable. */ void set_deletable(bool setting = true); @@ -1202,8 +1167,6 @@ public: /** Returns whether the window has been set to have a close button * via set_deletable(). * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return true if the window has been set to have a close button. */ bool get_deletable() const; @@ -1287,8 +1250,6 @@ public: * Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME * property which is mentioned in the ICCCM. * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param name The name of the themed icon. */ void set_icon_name(const Glib::ustring& name); @@ -1324,8 +1285,6 @@ public: /** Returns the name of the themed icon for the window, * see set_icon_name(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @return The icon name or 0 if the window has * no themed icon. */ @@ -1354,8 +1313,6 @@ public: /** Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't * had set_icon() called on them from a pixbuf. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param icon The icon. */ static void set_default_icon(const Glib::RefPtr& icon); @@ -1364,8 +1321,6 @@ public: * had set_icon_list() called on them from a named * themed icon, see set_icon_name(). * - * @newin{2,6} - * * @param name The name of the themed icon. */ static void set_default_icon_name(const Glib::ustring& name); @@ -1374,8 +1329,6 @@ public: * had set_icon_list() called on them from a file * on disk. Warns on failure if @a err is 0. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param filename Location of icon file. * @return true if setting the icon succeeded. */ @@ -1391,8 +1344,6 @@ public: * temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that * showing the main window would automatically result in notification. * - * @newin{2,2} - * * @param setting true to automatically do startup notification. */ static void set_auto_startup_notification(bool setting = true); @@ -1495,8 +1446,6 @@ public: * If you need to present a window without a timestamp, use * present(). See present() for details. * - * @newin{2,8} - * * @param timestamp The timestamp of the user interaction (typically a * button or key press event) which triggered this call. */ @@ -1595,8 +1544,6 @@ public: * * You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal * on Gtk::Widget. - * - * @newin{2,2} */ void fullscreen(); @@ -1609,8 +1556,6 @@ public: * * You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal * on Gtk::Widget. - * - * @newin{2,2} */ void unfullscreen(); @@ -1875,8 +1820,6 @@ public: * @a window is 0 or if @a window does not have an explicit * window group. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The Gtk::WindowGroup for a window or the default group. */ Glib::RefPtr get_group(); @@ -1885,16 +1828,12 @@ public: * @a window is 0 or if @a window does not have an explicit * window group. * - * @newin{2,10} - * * @return The Gtk::WindowGroup for a window or the default group. */ Glib::RefPtr get_group() const; /** Gets the type of the window. See Gtk::WindowType. - * - * @newin{2,20} * * @return The type of the window. */ @@ -1927,8 +1866,6 @@ public: * for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for * drawing attention to their dialogs. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param setting Whether to keep @a window above other windows. */ void set_keep_above(bool setting = true); @@ -1952,8 +1889,6 @@ public: * for user preferences and should not be used by applications e.g. for * drawing attention to their dialogs. * - * @newin{2,4} - * * @param setting Whether to keep @a window below other windows. */ void set_keep_below(bool setting = true); diff --git a/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relation.h b/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relation.h index a3e2b2a08c..3fe2bdb2ba 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relation.h +++ b/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relation.h @@ -167,8 +167,6 @@ public: /** Adds the specified AtkObject to the target for the relation, if it is * not already present. See also Atk::Object::add_relationship(). * - * - * @newin{1,9} * @param target An Atk::Object. */ void add_target(const Glib::RefPtr& target); diff --git a/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relationset.h b/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relationset.h index f722b54ceb..a1c6e92bc0 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relationset.h +++ b/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/relationset.h @@ -149,7 +149,6 @@ public: * of that type. If it is does contain a relation of that typea the target * is added to the relation. * - * @newin{1,9} * @param relationship An Atk::RelationType. * @param target An Atk::Object. */ diff --git a/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/text.h b/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/text.h index 56d585b73d..2156881e1b 100644 --- a/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/text.h +++ b/libs/tk/ztkmm/ztkmm/atkmm/text.h @@ -627,7 +627,6 @@ public: /** Get the bounding box for text within the specified range. * - * @newin{1,3} * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary * information is required. * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character @@ -639,7 +638,6 @@ public: /** Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box. * - * @newin{1,3} * @param rect An AtkTextRectagle giving the dimensions of the bounding box. * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window. * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.